The BMW 3 Series Sedan.: Owner'S Manual

Contents Owner's Manual for
Vehicle
A-Z The Ultimate Driving

Machine
THE BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN.

OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13

3 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the
printed quick reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG

© 2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English X/13, 11 13 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Addendum
ADDENDUM TO BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN

OWNER’S MANUAL 1402926810
We wanted to provide you with some vehicle and for maintenance under
updates and clarifications with respect to the Maintenance Program during
the printed BMW Owner’s Manual. the applicable warranty and
These updates and clarifications will maintenance coverage periods, you
supersede the materials contained in are free to elect, both during those
that document. periods and thereafter, to have
maintenance and repair work
1. Where the terms “service center,” provided by other service centers or
“the service center,” “your service repair shops.
center,” “service specialist,’ or
“service” are used in the Owner’s 3. Where the Owner’s Manual makes
Manual, we wanted to clarify that reference to parts and accessories
the terms refer to a BMW dealer’s having been approved by BMW,
service center or another service those references are intended to
center or repair shop that employs reflect that those parts and
trained personnel that can perform accessories are recommended by
maintenance and repair work on BMW of North America LLC. You
your vehicle in accordance with may elect to use other parts and
BMW specifications. accessories, but, if you do, we
recommend that you make sure that
2. Where the text of the Owner’s any such parts and/or accessories
Manual contains an affirmative are appropriate for use on your
instruction to contact a “service vehicle.
center” or “your service center,” we
wanted to clarify that BMW 4. At page 7, under the warranty
recommends that, if you are faced section’s discussion of
with one of the situations addressed homologation, where it states that
by that text, you contact or seek the you “cannot lodge warranty claims
assistance of a BMW dealer’s for your vehicle there,” the text
service center or another service should read that you “may not be
center or repair shop that employs able to lodge warranty claims for
trained personnel that can perform your vehicle there.”
maintenance and repair work on
your vehicle in accordance with 5. At page 7, under the “Parts and
BMW specifications. Accessories” section, in the fifth
sentence, the word “cannot” should
While BMW of North America LLC, read “does not.”
at no cost to you, will pay for repairs
required by the limited warranties 6. At page 53, in the “Checking and
provided with respect to your replacing safety belts” section, the
Addendum
text beginning, “Have the work by your service center or a tire

performed only by your service mounting specialist.”
center . . .” should be disregarded
and the following text should be 10. At page 196, under the heading:
read in lieu thereof: “BMW “Approved wheels and tires,” the
recommends having this work term “Approved” should be
performed by a service center as it disregarded and in lieu thereof, the
is important that this safety feature term “Recommended” should be
functions properly.” read in its place. In addition, the
text of that section should be
7. At page 90, under the heading: disregarded and the following text
“Special windshield,” the paragraph should be read in lieu thereof:
beginning, “Therefore have the
special windshield . . .” should be The manufacturer of your vehicle
disregarded and the following text strongly suggests that you use
should be read in lieu thereof: wheels and tires that have been
“BMW recommends that you have recommended by the vehicle
the special windshield replaced by manufacturer for your vehicle type;
the service center.” otherwise, for example, despite
having the same official size ratings,
8. At page 168 under the heading: variations can lead to body contact
“Objects within the range of and with it, the risk of severe
movement of the pedals” and at accidents.
page 226 under the heading:
“Carpets and floor mats,” the The manufacturer of your vehicle
paragraph that begins: “Only use does not evaluate non-
floor mats . . .” should be recommended wheels and tires to
disregarded and the following determine if they are suitable for
language should be read in lieu use on your vehicle.
thereof: “The manufacturer of your
vehicle recommends that you use 11. At page 197, under the heading:
floor mats that have been identified “Snow Chains,” the text should be
by it as appropriate for use in your disregarded and the following text
vehicle and that can be properly should be read in lieu thereof:
fixed in place.”
Only certain types of fine-link snow
9. At page 195, under the heading: chains have been tested by the
“Mounting,” the paragraph manufacturer of your vehicle and
beginning, “Have mounting and are determined by the manufacturer
balancing . . .” should be of your vehicle to be road safe and
disregarded and the following text are recommended by the
should be read in lieu thereof: manufacturer of your vehicle.
“BMW recommends that you have
mounting and balancing performed
Addendum
Information about recommended 16. At page 204, under the heading:

snow chains is available from a “Service and Warranty Information
service center. Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide
12. At page 199, under the heading Booklet for Canadian models,” the
“Hood,” the sentence beginning, “If second paragraph should be
you are unfamiliar” should be disregarded and the following text
disregarded. read in lieu thereof:
13. At page 202, under the heading: The manufacturer of your vehicle
“Approved oil types,” the references recommends that you have
to “Approved” should be read as maintenance and repair performed
“Suitable.” Immediately preceding by your BMW dealer’s service
the “Gasoline engine” chart, the center or another service center or
following sentence should be repair shop that employs trained
inserted: “Add engine oils that meet personnel that can perform
the following oil rating maintenance and repair work on
standards: . . .” your vehicle in accordance with
BMW specifications. The
14. At page 202, under the heading: manufacturer of your vehicle
“Alternative oil types,” the text recommends that you maintain
preceding the chart should be records of all maintenance and
disregarded, and in lieu thereof repair work performed on your
should be read as follows: “If an vehicle.
engine oil suitable for continuous
use is not available, up to 1 US 17. At page 207 and page 210, where it
quart/liter of an engine oil with the reads: “Do not perform work/bulb
following oil rating can be replacement on xenon headlamps,”
added: . . .” The reference to that text should be disregarded and
“specification” should be read as in lieu thereof the following text
“rating.” should be read: “Xenon headlamp
work or replacement can cause
15. At page 202, under the heading: serious and fatal injuries.” In the
“Engine oil change,” the text should text that follows, where it reads:
be disregarded and in lieu thereof “[h]ave any work on the xenon
should be read as follows: lighting system . . . ,” the following
words should be read as preceding
that passage: “It is strongly
BMW recommends that you have
suggested that you . . . .”
the oil changed at your BMW
dealer’s service center or at another
service center that has trained 18. At page 215, under the “Battery
personnel that can perform the work replacement” section, the text
in accordance with BMW should be disregarded and in lieu
specifications.
Addendum
thereof the following text should be

read:
Use of recommended vehicle

batteries
The manufacturer of your vehicle

recommends that you use vehicle
batteries that it has tested and
recommends for use in your vehicle;
otherwise the vehicle could be
damaged and systems or functions
may not be fully available.
After a battery replacement, the

manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends that you have the
battery registered on your vehicle
by a service center to ensure that all
comfort functions are fully available,
and that any “check control”
messages of these comfort
functions are no longer displayed.
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 180 Refueling
page 234. 182 Fuel
187 Wheels and tires
198 Engine compartment
6 Notes
200 Engine oil
At a glance 203 Coolant
14 Cockpit 204 Maintenance
18 iDrive 206 Replacing components
26 Voice activation system 217 Breakdown assistance
29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 223 Care
Controls Reference
34 Opening and closing 230 Technical data
49 Adjusting 234 Everything from A to Z
59 Transporting children safely
63 Driving
75 Displays
91 Lamps
96 Safety
116 Driving stability control systems
121 Driving comfort
144 Climate control
151 Interior equipment
159 Storage compartments
Driving tips
166 Things to remember when driving
169 Loading
172 Saving fuel

Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐
tivation system.
Orientation ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ voice activation system.
ular topic is by using the index. Refers to measures that can be taken to
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in help protect the environment.
the first chapter.
Symbols on vehicle components
Updates made after the editorial Indicates that you should consult the rele‐
deadline vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐
Any updates made after the editorial deadline mation on a particular part or assembly.
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐
pendix of the printed quick reference for the
vehicle. Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
User's manual for Navigation, all standard, country-specific and optional
Entertainment, Communication equipment that is offered in the model series.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment
munication and the short commands of the is also described and illustrated that is not
voice activation system are described in a sep‐ available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the
arate user's manual, which is also included selected optional equipment or the country-
with the onboard literature. specific variants.
This also applies for safety-related functions
Additional sources of information and systems.
The service center will be happy to answer any
For any options and equipment not described
other questions you may have.
in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is mentary Owner's Handbooks.
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls
are arranged differently than shown in the illus‐
trations.
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of Status of the Owner's
personal injury and serious damage to the ve‐ Manual
hicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐ Basic information
tion. The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐ policy of constant development that is con‐
lect individual functions. ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
6
Notes
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ Parts and Accessories
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
BMW recommends using parts and
those in your vehicle.
accessories approved by BMW for this
purpose.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline Your BMW center is the right contact for
genuine BMW parts and accessories, other
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
products approved by BMW and related
for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐
qualified advice.
pendix of the printed quick reference for the
vehicle. BMW has tested these products for safety and
suitability in relation to BMW vehicles.
BMW can assume responsibility for them.
For your own safety However, we cannot assume any responsibility
whatsoever for parts and accessories that have
Warranty not been specifically approved by BMW.
Your vehicle is technically configured for the BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual
operating conditions and registration require‐ product from another manufacturer can be
ments applying in the country of first delivery - used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated safety hazard. This guarantee is also not
in a different country it might be necessary to applicable when country-specific government
adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ approval has been granted. Testing of this kind
ating conditions and permit requirements. If may fail to embrace the entire range of
your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐ potential operating conditions to which
gation requirements in a certain country you components might be exposed on BMW
cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle vehicles. Such products could conceivably fail
there. Further information can be obtained to comply with BMW's own stringent quality
from your Service Centre. standards.
Maintenance and repairs California Proposition 65 Warning

Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern California laws require us to state the following
materials and high-performance electronics, warning:
requires suitable maintenance and repair Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
methods. bile components and parts, including compo‐
Therefore, have this work performed only by a nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ State of California to cause cancer and birth
ately trained personnel. defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
If this work is not carried out properly, there is certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
the danger of subsequent damage and related products of component wear contain or emit
safety hazards.
7
Notes
chemicals known to the State of California to Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ures:
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ ▷ BMW Maintenance system
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
for US models
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and Canadian models
water. If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
Service and warranty ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
We recommend that you read this publication not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ Warranty.
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Data memory
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Many electronic components on your vehicle
ranty. are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ and faults. This technical information generally
ited Warranty. documents the state of a component, a mod‐
Detailed information about these warranties is ule, a system or the environment:
listed in the Service and Warranty Information ▷ Operating states of system components,
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and fill levels for instance.
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
designed to meet the particular operating con‐ tion speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration,
ditions and homologation requirements in your transverse acceleration.
country and continental region in order to de‐
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, en‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating gagement of stability control systems.
conditions and homologation requirements. ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
You should also be aware of any applicable This data is purely technical in nature and is
warranty limitations or exclusions for such used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
country or region. In such case, please contact mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
Customer Relations for further information. routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
Maintenance pair services, service processes, warranty
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
road safety, operational reliability and the New mation can be read out from the event and
Vehicle Limited Warranty. fault memories by the service personnel, in‐
8
Notes
cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐ recorded by the EDR under normal driving
nostic tools. You can obtain further information conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
there if it is needed. After a fault is corrected, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
the information in the fault memory is deleted However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
or overwritten on a continuous basis. ment, could combine the EDR data with the
When the vehicle is in use, situations are con‐ type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
ceivable in which it might be possible to asso‐ quired during a crash investigation.
ciate this technical data with individuals if it is To read data recorded by an EDR, special
combined with other information, e.g., an acci‐ equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye wit‐ cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
ness accounts — possibly with the assistance hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
of an expert. enforcement, that have the special equipment,
Additional functions that are contractually can read the information if they have access to
agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐ the vehicle or the EDR.
cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle
data to be transmitted from the vehicle.
Reporting safety defects
Event Data Recorder EDR For US customers
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ The following only applies to vehicles owned
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to and operated in the US.
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ jury or death, you should immediately inform
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
The EDR is designed to record data related to tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
less. 1-800-831-1117.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
such data as: open an investigation, and if it finds that a
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
operating. may order a recall and remedy campaign.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
safety belts were fastened. individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
These data can help provide a better under‐ www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
standing of the circumstances in which NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
crashes and injuries occur. ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a formation about motor vehicle safety from
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are http://www.safercar.gov.
9
Notes
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehi‐
cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
10
Notes
11
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.

At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional
All standard, country-specific and optional equipment or country variant. This also applies
equipment that is offered in the model series is for safety-related functions and systems.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐
All around the steering wheel
1 Roller sunblinds 47 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

2 Rear window safety switch 46 tion 114
3 Power windows 45 Intelligent Safety 104

4 Exterior mirror operation 56 Collision warning with City Brak‐
5 Glove compartment on the driver's ing function 105.
side 159 Lane departure warning 112
Driver assistance systems
6 Lamps
14
Cockpit At a glance
Front fog lamps 94 Reduce distance 124
Parking lamps 91 Increase distance 124
Low beams 91 Cruise control rocker switch 129, 123

9 Instrument cluster 75
Automatic headlamp con‐ 10 Steering wheel buttons, right
trol 92
Entertainment source
Daytime running lights 92
Adaptive Light Control 92
Volume
High-beam Assistant 93
Instrument lighting 94
Voice activation 26
7 Steering column stalk, left

Telephone, see user's manual for
Turn signal 68 Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication
High beams, head‐ Thumbwheel for selection lists 85

lamp flasher 68 11 Steering column stalk, right
High-beam Assistant 93 Windshield wipers 68
Roadside parking lamps 92 Rain sensor 69
Computer 86 Clean the windshields and head‐

lamps 70
8 Steering wheel buttons, left 12 Start/stop the engine and switch

the ignition on/off 64
Store speed 128, 121
Auto Start/Stop function 65
Resume speed 129, 121
13 Horn
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ 14 Steering wheel heating 58
ing 128
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐

15 Adjust steering wheel 58
terrupting 121
16 Unlock hood 199
15
At a glance Cockpit
All around the center console
1 Headliner 17 9 Parking brake 67

2 Control Display 18 10 PDC Park Distance Control 130
3 Ventilation 149 Rearview camera 133
4 Hazard warning system 217 Parking assistant 138
Surround View 132
Central locking system 37 11 Driving Dynamics Control 118
5 Glove compartment 159 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 116
6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
12 Automatic transmission selector
nication
lever 71
7 Climate control 144
Manual transmission selector lever 71
8 Controller with buttons 18
16
Cockpit At a glance
All around the headliner
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lamps 94

quest 217
2 Glass sunroof, powered 47 5 Interior lamps 94
3 Indicator lamp, front passenger

airbag 98
17
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle equipment Control Display
All standard, country-specific and optional Hints

equipment that is offered in the model series is
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions.
ment is also described that is not available in a
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
equipment or country variant. This also applies Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
for safety-related functions and systems. be damaged.
Switching off
The concept
1. Press the button.
The iDrive combines the functions of a multi‐
2. "Switch off control display"
tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be
operated from a central location.
Using the iDrive during a trip
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other road users, never at‐
tempt to use the controls or enter information
unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance Switching on

Press the controller again to switch the screen
Controls back on.
Controller with navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller.
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
18
iDrive At a glance
1. Turn. Press the but‐ Function

ton
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus
2. Press. directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and create the settings.
1. Turn.
3. Move in four directions.
2. Press.
Buttons on controller
3. Move in two directions.
Press the but‐ Function
ton
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia

menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
19
At a glance iDrive
Buttons on controller Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.
Press the but‐ Function
ton 1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
MENU Open the main menu.
Audio Open audio menu last lis‐

tened to, switch between au‐
dio menus.
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
BACK Open previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
2. Press the controller.
Operating concept Menu items in the Owner's Manual

In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
Opening the main menu selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
Press the button. "Settings".
Changing between panels

After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
The current panel is closed and the previ‐
ous panel is displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the
current panel is not closed.
The main menu is displayed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐
main menu.
ous display.
20
iDrive At a glance
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
cate that additional panels can be opened. is displayed.
View of an opened menu

When a menu is opened, it generally opens
with the panel that was last selected in that
menu. To display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
The "Options" menu is displayed. box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The function is activated.
The function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller:
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is Selecting functions
displayed. 1. "Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
Options menu
3. Select the desired function.
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
▷ "Interactive map": operating the inter‐
This area remains unchanged.
active map.
▷ Control options for the selected main
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ "Audio feedback": the entered letters
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
and numbers are announced.
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Entering letters and numbers

Changing settings
The entry of the letters requires some practice
1. Select a field.
at the beginning. In the entry, pay attention to
the following:
21
At a glance iDrive
▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters Changing settings

and numbers, it may be necessary to Settings on the control display, such as the
switch via the controller to the correspond‐ volume, can be made via the touchpad. To do
ing Input mode, refer to page 25, e.g. this slide to the left or right accordingly.
when the spelling of upper and lower case
letters is identical.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on Example: setting the clock
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter accompanying signs, such as Setting the clock
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized. The possibility of input 1. Press the button. The main menu is
depends on the set language. Where nec‐ displayed.
essary, enter special characters via the 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
controller. lighted, and then press the controller.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, slide to the right in
the lower area of the touchpad.
Using interactive map and Internet 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
The interactive map in the navigation system to display "Time/Date".
and Internet sites can be moved via the touch‐ 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
pad. highlighted, and then press the controller.
Function Controls
Move interactive map Slide in the corre‐

or Internet sites. sponding direction.
Enlarge/shrink interac‐ Drag inwards or

tive map or Internet outwards on the
sites. touchpad with the
fingers.
Display the menu or Tap once.

open a link in the Inter‐
net.
22
iDrive At a glance
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐ Telephone symbols

lighted, and then press the controller.
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception

strength.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Wireless network is not available.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
Bluetooth is switched on.
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and Roaming is active.
press the controller. Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.

Status information SIM card is blocked.
Status field SIM card is missing.

The following information is displayed in the Enter the PIN.
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
Entertainment symbols
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off. Symbol Meaning
▷ Wireless network reception strength. CD/DVD player.
▷ Telephone status.
Music collection.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Gracenote® database.
Status field symbols
AUX-IN port.
The symbols are grouped as follows.
USB audio interface.
Radio symbols Mobile phone audio interface.
Symbol Meaning
Additional symbols
Satellite radio is switched on.
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched

off.
23
At a glance iDrive
Split screen tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
General information The settings are stored for the remote control
Additional information can be displayed on the currently in use.
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the onboard computer. Without navigation system and
telephone
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐
when you change to another menu. tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication.
Switching the split screen on and off
Saving a function
1. Press the button. 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. "Split screen"
2. Press the desired button for more
Selecting the display than 2 seconds.
1. Press the button. Running a function

2. "Split screen" Press the button.
3. Move the controller until the split screen is The function will run immediately. This
selected. means, for example, that the number is dialed
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen when a phone number is selected.
content".
5. Select the desired menu item. Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
Programmable memory
buttons
▷ To display short information: touch the
General information button.
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ ▷ To display detailed information: touch the
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ button for an extended period.
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
24
iDrive At a glance
Deleting the button assignments The entries are continuously compared to the
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for data stored in the vehicle.
approx. five seconds. ▷ Only those letters are offered during the
2. "OK" entry for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can
be entered using the spelling of language
Entering letters and numbers available on the Control Display.
General information
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐

ter or number.
Press the controller for an extended

period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and

numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Move the controller up.
Without navigation system

Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
25
At a glance Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle equipment Using voice activation
All standard, country-specific and optional
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
equipment or country variant. This also applies 2. Wait for the signal.
for safety-related functions and systems. 3. Say the command.
The command is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
The concept This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the cates that the voice activation system is active.
Control Display can be operated by spoken If no other commands are available, operate
commands via the voice activation system. the function in this case via iDrive.
The system prompts you to make your en‐
tries. Terminating the voice activation
▷ Functions that can only be used when the system
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated Briefly press the button on the steer‐
using the voice activation system. ing wheel or ›End‹.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation
Possible commands
system. Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on which
Requirements menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system Short commands exist for many functions.
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can
fied. also be selected via the voice activation sys‐
Set the language, refer to page 88. tem. Speak these list entries exactly as they
are displayed in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud

You can have the available commands read out
loud for you: ›commands‹
For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐
played, the commands for the settings are
read out loud.
26
Voice activation system At a glance
Executing functions using short Via short command

commands Playback of the CD can also be started via a
Functions on the main menu can be performed short command.
directly by means of short commands, nearly
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
irrespective of which menu item is currently
if necessary.
selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands of the voice activation 2. Press the button on the steering
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ wheel.
munication Owner's Manual.
3. ›Disc ... Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Setting the voice dialog
Additional commands for the help dialog: You can set whether the system should use
the standard dialog or a shorter version.
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
current operating options and the most im‐ In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the
portant commands for them are an‐ announcements from the system are issued in
nounced. an abbreviated form.
▷ ›Help voice activation‹: information about 1. "Settings"
the principle of operation for the voice acti‐ 2. "Language/Units"
vation system is announced.
3. "Speech type:"
4. Select the setting.
Example: playing back a CD
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output

if necessary.
2. Press the button on the steering

wheel.
3. ›Media menu‹ Adjusting the volume
The medium last played is played back.
Turn the volume button while giving an in‐
4. ›C D‹ struction until the desired volume is set.
5. ›C D drive‹ ▷ The volume remains constant even if the
6. ›Disc ... Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4. volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
27
At a glance Voice activation system
Hints on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 217, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
28
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Vehicle equipment Select components
All standard, country-specific and optional 1. Press the button.

2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
ment is also described that is not available in a 3. Press the controller.
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional 4. Selecting desired range:
equipment or country variant. This also applies ▷ "Quick reference"
for safety-related functions and systems.
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. The equipment
and functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐
bed therein.
Components of the Integrated

Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of Leafing through the Owner's Manual
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or access possibilities. Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
Quick Reference Guide
page is displayed.
Located in the Quick Reference is important
information for the operation of the vehicle, the Page by page without link access
operation of basic vehicle functions or for what
Leaf through the pages directly while skipping
to do in the event of a flat tire. This information
the links.
can also be displayed during driving.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
Search by pictures the controller to leaf from page to page.
Information and descriptions based on illustra‐ Leaf back.
tions can be searched via search by pictures.
This is helpful, for example, if the description of
an outfitting package that cannot be named is Leaf forward.
needed.
Owner's Manual
Information and descriptions can be searched
by direct entry of a search term via the index.
29
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Context help - Owner's Manual to the Programmable memory buttons

temporarily selected function
The relevant information can be opened di‐ General information
rectly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
Opening via the iDrive rectly.
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the options menu: Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
1. Press the button or move the control‐
ler to the right repeatedly until the 2. Press the desired button for more
"Options" menu is displayed. than 2 seconds.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Executing
Opening when a Check Control Press the button.
message is displayed The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
Directly from the Check Control message on mediately.
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual
To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
switch between the two displays:
1. Press the button or move the control‐

ler to the right repeatedly until the
"Options" menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to

the function displayed last.
5. Press the button to return to the page

of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To switch back and forth repeatedly between
the function displayed last and the page of the
Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4
and 5. This opens a new panel every time.
30
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
31
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.

Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle equipment Integrated key

equipment or country variant. This also applies
Remote control/key Press the button on the back of the remote

control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.
General information The integrated key fits the following locks:
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ ▷ Driver's door.
trols with keys.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
Every remote control contains a replaceable side.
battery.
The settings called up and implemented when The front passenger glove compartment con‐
the car is unlocked depend on which remote tains a switch for separately securing the trunk
control is used to unlock the car. Personal Pro‐ lid, refer to page 41.
file, refer to page 35.
Replacing the battery
Information on the required maintenance is
stored in the remote control as well. Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 204
At a glance
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote

control.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
1 Unlocking ment, arrow 2.
2 Locking 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
3 Opening the trunk lid positive side facing upwards.
4 Panic mode in alarm system 5. Press the cover closed.
34
Opening and closing Controls
Take the used battery to a recycling Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while
center or to your service center. pressing the brake.
Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check
New remote controls Control message appears, hold the remote
control, as shown, against the marked area on
New remote controls are available from the
the steering column and press the Start/Stop
service center.
button within 10 seconds while pressing the
clutch pedal.
Loss of the remote controls
Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
service center.
Personal Profile
Emergency detection of remote
control The concept
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start You can set several of your vehicle's functions
the engine in situations such as the following: to suit your personal needs and preferences.
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ ▷ The settings are automatically saved in the
mote control by external sources. profile currently activated.
▷ Discharged battery in the remote control. ▷ The remote control used is detected when
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro‐
▷ Interference of radio transmission by mo‐
file is called up.
bile devices in close proximity to the re‐
mote control. ▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has
▷ Interference of radio transmission by
been used in the meantime by someone
charger while charging items such as mo‐
else with another remote control.
bile devices in the vehicle.
The individual settings are stored for three
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
Personal Profiles and one guest profile.
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
Transmitting the settings
Starting the engine with emergency Your personal settings can be taken with you
detection of the remote control to another vehicle equipped with the Personal
Profile function. Additional information is avail‐
able from the service center.
The settings are transmitted as follows:
▷ Via the USB interface for data transfer.
▷ BMW Online.
Automatic transmission: if a corresponding

Check Control message appears, hold the re‐
mote control, as shown, against the marked
area on the steering column and press the
35
Profile management Exporting profiles

Most settings of the active profile and the
Opening the profiles saved contacts can be exported.
A different profile can be called up than the This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
one associated with the remote control cur‐ personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
rently in use. to a workshop for example.
1. "Settings" 1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles" 2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile. 3. "Export profile"
Called up profile is assigned to the remote 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
control being used at the time.
USB interface: "USB device"
Renaming profiles
Using the guest profile
1. "Settings"
The guest profile can be used to make individ‐
2. "Profiles" ual settings without affecting the three Per‐
The current profile is selected. sonal Profiles.
3. Open "Options". This can be useful for drivers who are using
4. "Rename current profile" the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
own profile.
Resetting profiles 1. "Settings"
The settings of the active profile are reset to 2. "Profiles"
their default values.
The current profile is selected.
1. "Settings" 3. Open "Guest".
2. "Profiles" 4. Adjust the settings.
The current profile is selected. Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile" Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
Importing profiles start for selecting the desired profile.
Existing settings and contacts are overwritten 1. "Settings"
with the imported profile.
2. "Profiles"
1. "Settings" 3. Open "Options".
2. "Profiles" 4. "Display user list at startup"
3. "Import profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" Personal Profile settings
USB interface: "USB device" The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile.
▷ Collision warning: warning time.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
36
▷ CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to The system simultaneously engages and re‐
last. leases the locks on the following:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle: settings. ▷ Doors.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control: sport program ▷ Trunk lid.
▷ Driver's seat position: automatically re‐ ▷ Fuel filler flap.
trieved after unlocking.
▷ Programmable memory buttons: assign‐ Operating from the outside
ment. ▷ Via the remote control.
▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness, ▷ Via the door handles of the driver's and
position and rotation of the display. front passenger doors.
▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐ The following takes place simultaneously
ting. when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re‐
▷ Tone: tone settings. mote control:
▷ Automatic climate control/Automatic cli‐ ▷ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped,

mate control with enhanced features: set‐ the theft protection is activated/deacti‐
tings. vated. Theft protection prevents the doors
from being unlocked using the lock but‐
▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice
tons or the door opener.
output on/off.
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
▷ Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
signal tone volume.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 44, is
▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to
armed or disarmed.
last, special settings.
▷ Rearview camera: selection of functions Operating from the inside
and type of display.
▷ Side View: selection of the display type.
▷ Language on the Control Display.
▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/
off.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting,
on/off.
▷ Daytime running lights: current setting.
▷ Triple turn signal activation. Via the button for the central locking system.
▷ Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the
after starting to drive. fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the

Central locking system central locking system unlocks automatically.
The hazard warning system and interior lamps
The concept come on.
The central locking system becomes active
when the driver's door is closed.
37
Opening and closing: from Switching on interior lamps and

courtesy lamps
the outside
Press the button on the remote control
Using the remote control with the vehicle locked.
General information If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐

onds of when the vehicle was locked Interior
Take the remote control with you motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-
People or animals left unattended in a theft warning system, refer to page 45, are
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ switched off. After locking, wait 10 seconds
side. Always take the remote control with you before interior lamps and courtesy lamps are
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle switched on.
can then be opened from the outside.◀
Panic mode
Unlocking You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol. Press the button on the remote con‐
The vehicle is unlocked. trol for at least 3 seconds.
Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy To switch off the alarm: press any button.
lamps are switched on.
Opening the trunk lid
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
Create the settings, refer to page 43. Press the button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
Convenient opening
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it
The remote control can be used to simultane‐ was previously locked or unlocked.
ously open the windows and the glass sunroof.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
Press and hold the button on the re‐ up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
mote control. before opening.
The windows and the glass sunroof open. In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk
lid can only be opened using the remote con‐
Releasing the button stops the motion.
trol if the vehicle has been unlocked.
Locking Do not place the remote control in the

cargo area
Press the button on the remote control.
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
Locking from the outside mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside the trunk lid is closed.◀
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
The trunk lid is locked again as soon as it is
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
pushed closed.
edge.◀
38
Malfunction Using the door lock

If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐
locked with the remote control, the battery General information
may be discharged or there may be interfer‐
ence from external sources such as mobile
phones, metal objects, overhead power lines,
transmission towers, etc.
If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver's door at
the door lock using the integrated key.
For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Locking from the outside
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
erned by the following:
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
FCC ID: be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
▷ LX8766S. edge.◀
▷ LX8766E. The alarm system is triggered when the door is
▷ LX8CAS. opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door
▷ LX8CAS2. lock.
▷ MYTCAS4. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle

with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
Compliance statement: tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC the remote control.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following Only the driver's door is unlocked or locked via
two conditions: the door lock.
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and Locking the doors and trunk lid at
▷ this device must accept any interference once
received, including interference that may To lock all doors and the trunk lid at once:
cause undesired operation.
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to ing the button for the central locking sys‐
these devices could void the user's authority to tem in the interior.
operate this equipment.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
senger door.
3. Lock the vehicle.
▷ Lock the driver's door using the
integrated key in the door lock, or
▷ Press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door
from the outside.
39
The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the Trunk lid
remote control.
Opening
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or un‐ up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
lock the vehicle using the integrated key via before opening.
the door lock on the driver's door.
Opening from the outside
Opening and closing: from

the inside
Locking and unlocking
▷ Press the button on the trunk lid.
▷ Press the button on the remote

control for approx. 1 second.
▷ With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens
Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the with no-touch activation, refer to
doors and the trunk lid when the front doors page 42.
are closed, but they are not secured against
theft. Opening from the inside
Push the button in the driver's foot‐
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
well.
Unlocking and opening If the vehicle is stationary, the trunk lid opens if
▷ Either unlock the doors together using the it is not locked.
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the arm‐ Closing
rest or
▷ Pull the door opener twice individually on
each door: the first time unlocks the door,
the second time opens it.
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk

lid make it easier to pull down the lid.
40
Keep the closing path clear Comfort Access

Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐ The concept
sult.◀ The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
Do not place the remote control in the
cargo area All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ The vehicle automatically detects the remote
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when control when it is nearby or in the passenger
the trunk lid is closed.◀ compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
Locking separately tions:
The trunk lid can be locked separately with the ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
switch in the front passenger glove compart‐ ▷ Convenient closing.
ment. ▷ Unlocking of the trunk lid separately.
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. ▷ Open trunk lid with no-touch activation.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐ ▷ Start the engine.
row 2.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
ence nearby.
secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from
the central locking system. ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle.
If the glove compartment on the front passen‐
ger side is locked, the trunk lid cannot be ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
opened. possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked ▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
using valet service. The infrared remote con‐ mote control is in the vehicle.
trol can be handed out without the key.
Comparison with ordinary remote
Emergency unlocking control
The functions can be controlled by pressing
the buttons of the remote control or Comfort
Access.
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.

The trunk lid unlocks.
41
Unlocking Monitor the closing process

Monitor the closing process to ensure
that no one becomes trapped.◀
Unlocking the trunk lid separately

Press the button on the exterior of the trunk
lid.
This corresponds to pressing the but‐
ton on the remote control.
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front Do not place the remote control in the
passenger door completely, arrow 1. cargo area
This corresponds to pressing the button Take the remote control with you and do not
on the remote control. leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Locking
Opening trunk lid with no-touch
activation
With Comfort Access, the trunk lid can be
opened with no-touch activation using the re‐
mote control you are carrying.
Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot
motion in the center of the area at the rear of
the car and the trunk lid opens.
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, Foot movement to be carried out
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
Do not touch vehicle
This corresponds to pressing the button
on the remote control. With the foot motion, make sure there is
steady stance and do not touch the vehicle;
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
otherwise, there is a danger of injury, e. g. from
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
hot exhaust system parts.◀
sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
hicle. 1. Place in the center behind the vehicle,
about arm's length from the trunk lid.
Convenient closing 2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far
under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐
Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2,
ately pull it back. With this movement, the
with the finger and hold it down.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof are closed.
42
leg must pass through the ranges of both Adjusting

sensors.
Unlocking
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select symbol or "Unlock button:"
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Opening Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it
locks the entire vehicle.
was previously locked or unlocked.
▷ "All doors"
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available The entire vehicle is unlocked.
before opening. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐ the country-specific variant, you can set
tem flashes. whether the doors are also unlocked with the
button on the remote control.
Preventing inadvertent opening
In situations where the trunk lid should is Confirmation signals from the vehicle
not to be opened with no-touch activation, en‐
sure that the remote control is located beyond
currently in use.
the range of the sensor, at least 5 ft/1.50 m
from the rear of the car. 1. "Settings"
Otherwise, the trunk lid may be opened inad‐ 2. "Doors/key"
vertently, for example by an unintentional or 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
misinterpreted movement of the foot.◀ mation signals.
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
Malfunction
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Comfort Access may not function properly if it
experiences interference from external sour‐ Automatic locking
ces such as mobile phones, metal objects,
overhead power lines, transmission towers,
currently in use.
etc.
In this case, open or close the vehicle using the 1. "Settings"
buttons on the remote control or use the 2. "Doors/key"
integrated key in the door lock. 3. Select the desired function:
If there is a malfunction, open the trunk lid with ▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
the remote control button or with the button on
the trunk lid.
43
The vehicle locks automatically after a The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:
short period of time if a door is not ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
opened.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
▷ "Lock after start driving" tem.
The vehicle locks automatically after ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
you drive away.
Arming and disarming the alarm
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings system
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐ General information
rently in use. When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐
are automatically retrieved if this function was cess at the door lock, the alarm system is
activated. armed or disarmed at the same time.
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
Door lock and armed alarm system
If this function is used, first make sure
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
that the footwell behind the driver's seat is
opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door
empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or ob‐
lock.
jects damaged when the seat is moved back.◀
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
The adjustment procedure is interrupted: with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed. tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of
▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐ the remote control.
ory is pressed.
Trunk lid and armed alarm system
Activating the setting The trunk lid can be opened even when the
1. "Settings" alarm system is armed.
2. "Doors/key" Press the button on the remote con‐
3. "Last seat position autom." trol for approx. 1 second.
With Comfort Access the trunk lid opens with

no-touch activation, refer to page 42.
Alarm system After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and
monitored again if the doors are locked. The
The concept
hazard warning system flashes once.
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
In some vehicle equipment variants, the trunk
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the trunk lid can only be opened using the remote con‐
lid. trol if the vehicle was unlocked first.
▷ Movements in the vehicle.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐ Panic mode
tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the You can trigger the alarm system if you find
car. yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.
44
Press the button on the remote con‐ Tilt alarm sensor

trol for at least 3 seconds. The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
To switch off the alarm: press any button. The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
Switching off the alarm towed.
To terminate the alarm:
Interior motion sensor
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
The windows and glass sunroof must be
trol.
closed for the system to function properly.
▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying
the remote control with you, grasp the Avoiding unintentional alarms
driver side or front passenger side door
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
handle completely.
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
mirror ▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every is locked.
2 seconds:
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
The system is armed. onds and then continues to flash.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ again.
cured.
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp
flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐ Power windows
sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ General information
ing:
Take the remote control with you
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
Take the remote control with you when
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
until the engine ignition is switched on, but ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐
no longer than approx. 5 minutes: jure themselves.◀
An alarm has been triggered.
45
The window reopens slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
No window accessories
Opening Do not install any accessories in the

range of movement of the windows; otherwise,
▷ Press the switch to the resistance the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
point.
The window opens while the switch is held. Closing without the pinch protection
system
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ Keep the closing path clear
ance point. Monitor the closing process and make
The window opens automatically. sure that the closing path of the window is
Pressing the switch again stops the motion. clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Convenient opening, refer to page 38, via the For example, if there is an external danger or if
remote control. ice on the windows prevents a window from
closing normally, proceed as follows:
Closing
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
Keep the closing path clear and hold it there.
Monitor the closing process and make The pinch protection is limited and the
sure that the closing path of the window is window reopens slightly if the closing force
clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
point. there.
The window closes while the switch is The window closes without pinch protec‐
held. tion.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance Safety switch

point. The safety switch in the driver's door can be
The window closes automatically. used to prevent children, for example, from
Pressing the switch stops the motion. opening and closing the rear windows using
the switches in the rear.
Pinch protection system
Switching on and off
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as
a window closes, the closing action is inter‐ Press the button.
rupted.
46
The LED lights up if the safety function is Glass sunroof, powered

switched on.
General information
Safety switch for rear operation
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
Press the safety switch when transport‐ tion is switched on.
ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may
result if the windows are closed without super‐ Keep the closing path clear
vision.◀ Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Roller sunblinds Take the remote control with you
Take the remote control with you when
Roller sunblind for rear window
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐
General information
selves.◀
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blind for the rear window after having activated
it a number of times in a row, the system is
blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐
ing. Let the system cool.
The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot
be moved at low interior temperatures.
Extending or retracting roller blind for

rear window
Press the button.
Tilting the glass sunroof
Push switch upward briefly.
Roller sunblinds for the rear side ▷ Closed roof is tilted open.
windows
▷ The opened roof closes until
Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook it is in its tilted position. The
it onto the bracket. sliding visor stays com‐
Do not open the window while the roller pletely open.
sunblind is raised.
Do not open the window while the roller sun‐ Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
blind is raised; otherwise, there is a risk of sliding visor together
damage at high speeds that may result in per‐
▷ Slide switch back to the re‐
sonal injury.◀
sistance point and hold.
Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor open together as long as
the switch is held down.
▷ Press switch back past the resistance
point.
47
The glass sunroof and sliding visor open Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐
automatically. Pressing the switch again opens slightly if the closing force exceeds
stops the opening motion. a certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
Analogously, the glass sunroof is closed by
resistance point and hold until the roof
sliding the switch forward.
closes without pinch protection. Make sure
The sliding visor remains open and can be that the closing area is clear.
closed by hand.
Convenient operation, refer to page 38, via the Closing from the raised position
remote control. without pinch protection
Convenient closing, refer to page 42, with If there is an external danger, push the switch
Comfort Access. forward past the resistance point and hold it.
The roof closes without pinch protection.
Comfort position
Stops the roof in the comfort position if the Initializing after a power failure
roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise After a power failure during the opening or
in the passenger compartment. closing process, the roof can only be operated
If desired, continue the movement by pressing to a limited extent.
the switch.
Initializing the system
Pinch protection system The system can be initialized when the vehicle
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐ is stationary and the engine is running.
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ During the initialization, the roof closes without
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately pinch protection.
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing. Keep the closing path clear
The glass sunroof opens again slightly. Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐ is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check Press the switch up and hold it
that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, until the initialization is com‐
the closing action may not be interrupted in plete:
certain extreme situations, such as when thin ▷ Initialization begins within
objects are present.◀ 15 seconds and is com‐
pleted when the sunroof is
Closing from the open position completely closed.
without pinch protection ▷ The roof closes without pinch protection.
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐

sistance point and hold.
48
Adjusting Controls
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment Manually adjustable seats
All standard, country-specific and optional At a glance

Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital 1 Forward/backward
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
2 Thigh support
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with: 3 Seat tilt
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 52. 4 Backrest width
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 53. 5 Lumbar support
▷ Airbags, refer to page 96. 6 Height

7 Backrest tilt
Seats Forward/backward
General information
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle
control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the

rear
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
Also on the front passenger side, do not incline direction.
the backrest on the front passenger side too
far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
slipping under the safety belt in the event of an ward or back slightly to make sure it engages
accident. This would eliminate the protection properly.
normally provided by the belt.◀
49
Controls Adjusting
Height Electrically adjustable seats
At a glance
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat

or lift it off, as necessary.
1 Seat and mirror memory
Backrest tilt 2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Note
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the remote control currently in use. When
the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control,
the position is automatically retrieved if the
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
function, refer to page 44, is activated for this
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
purpose.
Seat tilt Adjustments in detail

1. Forward/back.
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired

tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
engages properly.
50
Adjusting Controls
2. Height. Thigh support
3. Seat tilt. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch.
4. Backrest tilt. The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
51
Controls Adjusting
Front seat heating If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐

nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 173, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press the button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Switching on
Press the button once for each tem‐ Safety belts
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when Seats with safety belt
three LEDs are lit. The vehicle has five seats, each of which is
If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐ equipped with a safety belt.
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last. Number of safety belts
When ECO PRO, refer to page 173, is acti‐ Your vehicle has been fitted with five safety
vated, the heater output is reduced. belts for the safety of you and your passen‐
gers. However, they can only offer protection
when adjusted correctly.
Switching off
Press the button longer. Hints
The LEDs go out. Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving away.
Rear seat heating To protect the occupants, the belt locking trig‐
gers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the
holder when applying it.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐
Switching on sengers sitting on the left and right.
Press the button once for each tem‐ ▷ The center rear seat belt buckle is solely
perature level. intended for the center passenger.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
52
Adjusting Controls
One person per safety belt Safety belt reminder for driver's and
Never allow more than one person to passenger's seat
wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀ nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
Putting on the belt
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the if objects are placed on the front passenger
body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies seat.
low around the hips in the lap area and does
not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt
can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal Damage to safety belts
impact and injure the abdomen. In the case of strain caused by accidents or
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, damage:
rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
objects, or be pinched.◀ tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
checked.
Reduction of restraining effect
Checking and replacing safety belts
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull
the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the Have the work performed only by your
tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed; service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the that this safety feature will function properly.◀
restraining effect reduced.◀
Buckling the belt Head restraints in the front

Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle. Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
Unbuckling the belt approximately at ear level.
1. Hold the belt firmly.
Distance
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
the tilt of the backrest.
53
Controls Adjusting
Adjusting the height
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as

possible.
▷ To raise: pull.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
head restraint out completely.
push the head restraint down.
Before transporting passengers
Tilt Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
Three different tilt positions are available.
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Rear head restraints

Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐
straint forward, arrow 1. Adjusting the head restraint
▷ Back: press the button, arrow 2. The head Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
restraint folds as far back as possible. occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be Height
sitting in the seat in question. Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
54
Adjusting Controls
1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as

possible.
▷ To raise: pull.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
head restraint out completely.
push the head restraint down.
The center head restraint cannot be adjusted Before transporting passengers
in elevation. Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
Folding down head restraints able.◀
Extending/retracting head restraint
Only fold down head restraint if no pas‐
sengers are in the rear. Fold out retracted Seat and mirror memory
headrests again if passengers are being car‐
ried in the rear; otherwise, there is increased Hints
risk of injury in the event of an accident.◀
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the
seat could result in an accident.◀
Keep the movement area unobstructed

When changing the seat position, keep
the seat's area of movement unobstructed;
otherwise, people can be injured or objects
damaged.◀
▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
55
Controls Adjusting
General information 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2

until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.
Calling up of a seat position

deactivated
After a brief period, the calling up of stored
seat positions is deactivated to save battery
power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror ▷ Open and close the door or trunk lid.
positions can be stored and retrieved for each ▷ Press a button on the remote control.
remote control. Settings for the backrest width
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
and lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Storing
Mirrors
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position. Exterior mirrors
3. Press the button. The LED in the At a glance

button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED
goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Press the button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
1 Adjusting
Comfort function 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
1. Open the driver's door.
3 Fold in and out
2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
General information
The corresponding seat position is performed The mirror on the passenger side is more
automatically. curved than the driver's side mirror.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
Estimating distances correctly
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
Safety mode than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you
1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk
nition.
of an accident.◀
56
Adjusting Controls
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the Fold in and out

mirror setting is stored for the remote control
Press the button.
in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if the setting for this function is active. Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
Selecting a mirror ▷ In car washes.
To change over to the other mirror: ▷ In narrow streets.
Slide the mirror changeover switch. ▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Adjusting electrically Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
25 mph/40 km/h.
tion in which the button is pressed.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before washing the car in an automatic
Saving positions
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 55 with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could
be damaged, depending on the width of the
Adjusting manually vehicle.◀
If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
press the edges of the mirror glass. Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
Automatic Curb Monitor
whenever the engine is running.
The concept
Automatic dimming feature
When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
med. Photocells are used for control in the In‐
senger side. This improves your view of the
terior rear view mirror, refer to page 58.
curb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐
ing, for example.
Activating
1. Slide the mirror changeover switch

to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage transmission position R.
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger side mirror position.
57
Controls Adjusting
Interior rearview mirror, manually Steering wheel

dimmable
General information
Turn knob
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by

the interior mirror.
Interior rearview mirror, automatic

dimming feature
The concept 1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Steering wheel heating
Photocells are used for control:

▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirement
For proper operation:
Switching on/off
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside Press the button.
rearview mirror and the windshield.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
58
Transporting children safely Controls
Transporting children safely

Vehicle equipment vated. Automatic deactivation of front passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 98.
equipment that is offered in the model series is Note
ment is also described that is not available in a Deactivated front passenger airbags
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional If a child restraint fixing system is used in
equipment or country variant. This also applies the front passenger seat, the front passenger
for safety-related functions and systems. airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
The right place for children straint fixing system.◀
Note
Children in the vehicle Installing child restraint
Do not leave children unattended in the fixing systems
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the Before mounting
doors.◀ Before mounting child restraint fixing systems,
ensure that the rear seat backrests are locked.
Children should always be in the rear
Hints
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat. Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
Transporting children in the rear
To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
Only transport children younger than
systems, observe the information provided by
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in
the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
the rear in child restraint fixing systems pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
vided in accordance with the age, weight and
size of the child; otherwise, there is an in‐ Lock the rear seat backrests in position
creased risk of injury in an accident.
Before installation of child restraint sys‐
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a tems on the rear seat backrest, set a backrest
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint tilt at which the childseat rests firmly against
fixing system can no longer be used, due to the backrest and securely latch all backrests.
their age, weight and size.◀ Otherwise, the stability of the child seat is lim‐
ited, and there is an increased risk of injury be‐
Children on the front passenger seat cause of unexpected movement of the rear
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ seat backrest.◀
straint fixing system in the front passenger
seat, make sure that the front, knee and side
airbags on the front passenger side are deacti‐
59
Controls Transporting children safely
On the front passenger seat Child seat security
Deactivating airbags
After installing a child restraint fixing system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐
senger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐
matically, refer to page 98.
Deactivating the front passenger airbags
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
If a child restraint fixing system is used in
safety belt can be locked against pulling out for
the front passenger seat, the front passenger
mounting the child restraint fixing systems.
airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐ Locking the safety belt
straint fixing system.◀ 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system
Seat position and height with the belt.
Before installing a child restraint fixing system, 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
move the front passenger seat as far back as pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
possible and adjust its height to the highest system. The safety belt is locked.
position to obtain the best possible position for
the belt and to offer optimal protection in the Unlocking the safety belt
event of an accident.
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
Do not change the seat position and height af‐
2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
ter this.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
Backrest width pletely.
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint fixing system in the front pas‐
senger seat, open the backrest width com‐ LATCH child restraint fixing
pletely. Do not change the backrest width system
again and do not call up a memory position.
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐
Backrest width for the child seat dren.
Before installing a child restraint fixing
system in the front passenger seat, the back‐ Note
rest width must be opened completely. Do not Manufacturer's information for LATCH
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, child restraint fixing systems
the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint
fixing systems, observe the operating and
safety information from the system manufac‐
turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be
reduced.◀
60
Transporting children safely Controls
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors With a through-loading system:

The lower anchors may be used to attach the Position
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
chors
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint
fixing system is resting snugly against the
backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection
offered may be reduced.◀ Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐
cated behind the indicated covers.
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐
ing system, pull the belt away from the child
restraint fixing system. Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing
systems
Without a through-loading system: 1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐
Position fer to the user's manual of the system.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a

tether strap
Mounting points
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐

cated in the gap between the seat and back‐
rest.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are

two outer or three mounting points for child re‐
straint fixing systems with a tether strap.
61
Controls Transporting children safely
Note 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it

down.
Mounting eyes
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Only use the mounting eyes for the up‐
per retaining strap to secure child restraint fix‐
ing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes
could be damaged.◀ Locking the doors and
windows
Retaining strap guide
Rear doors
Retaining strap
Make sure that the upper retaining strap
is not routed over the head restraints or sharp
edges and is free of twisting on its way to the
upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can‐
not properly secure the child restraint fixing
system in an accident.◀
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.

The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's door if
1 Direction of travel children are being transported in the
rear.
2 Head restraint.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap This locks various functions so that they can‐
4 Mounting point/eye not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
refer to page 46.
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the mounting point
1. Remove the mounting point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the mounting eye.
62
Driving Controls
Driving
Vehicle equipment Note
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio ready state when the
door is opened if the lights are switched off or
the daytime running lights are switched on.
Ignition off
Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
button again, but do not depress the brake.
Start/Stop button Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/
Stop button again, and do not press on the
The concept clutch pedal at the same time.
Pressing the Start/Stop button All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
switches the ignition on or off out.
and starts the engine. To save battery power when the engine is off,
Automatic transmission: The switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
engine starts if the brake is de‐ electronic systems/power consumers.
pressed while pressing the Start/Stop button. Transmission position P with the ignition
Manual transmission: the engine starts if the off
clutch pedal is depressed when the Start/Stop When ignition is switched off, selector lever
button is pressed. position P is engaged automatically. When in
an automatic car wash, for example, ensure
Ignition on that the ignition is not switched off acciden‐
tally.◀
Automatic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
button but do not depress the brake. The ignition automatically cuts off while the
Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/ vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:
Stop button, and do not press on the clutch ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
pedal at the same time. low beams are activated.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the completely, so that the engine can still be
instrument cluster light up for varying lengths started. This function is only available
of time. when the low beams are switched off.
To save battery power when the engine is off, ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
electronic systems/power consumers. low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if
the driver's door is open and the low
beams are switched off.
63
Controls Driving
When the ignition is switched off, by opening Repeated starting in quick succession
or closing the driver's door or unbuckling the Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to
driver's seat belt, the radio ready state remains start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several
active. times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel
is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing
Radio ready state a risk of overheating and damage to the cata‐
Activate radio ready state: lytic converter.◀
▷ When the engine is running: press the Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
Start/Stop button. the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at
Some electronic systems/power consumers moderate engine speeds.
remain ready for operation.
The radio ready state switches off automati‐ Diesel engine
cally: If the engine is cold and temperatures are be‐
▷ After approx. 8 minutes. low approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process may
be delayed somewhat due to automatic pre‐
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
heating.
tral locking system.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
Automatic transmission
started.
Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
Starting the engine
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Hints The ignition is activated automatically for a
Enclosed areas certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may
Manual transmission
lead to loss of consciousness and death. The
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
Starting the engine
odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.◀
Unattended vehicle 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with tral.
the engine running; doing so poses a risk of 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
danger.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐ gine starts.
mission in selector lever position P or neutral
to prevent the vehicle from moving.◀
64
Driving Controls
Engine stop Automatic Engine Start/Stop

Function
Hints
Take the remote control with you The concept
Take the remote control with you when The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ The system switches off the engine during a
ple, cannot start the engine.◀ stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
Set the parking brake and further secure engine starts again automatically for driving
the vehicle as required off.
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ Certain vehicle components may experience
erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward additional wear as a result of this system.
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐
hicle, for example, by turning the steering Automatic mode
wheel in the direction of the curb. ◀ The Auto Start/Stop function is operational af‐
ter each engine start.
Before driving into a car wash This function is activated at speeds faster than
In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
car wash, pay attention to the information re‐
garding Washing in automatic car washes, re‐ Engine stop
fer to page 223. The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
Manual transmission:
Switching off the engine ▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
not pressed.
1. Engage transmission position P with the
vehicle stopped. ▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
Automatic transmission:
The engine is switched off.
▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐
The radio ready state is switched on.
tion D.
3. Set the parking brake.
▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stopped.
Manual transmission
▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv‐
Switching off the engine er's door is closed.
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the The air volume of the air conditioner is reduced
Start/Stop button. when the engine is switched off.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
65
Controls Driving
Displays in the instrument cluster ▷ Automatic transmission:

The READY display in the tach‐ By releasing the brake pedal.
ometer signals that the Auto After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically. Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
The display indicates that the will not start again automatically if any one of
conditions for an automatic en‐ the following conditions are met.
gine stop have not been satis‐ ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
fied. the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Note Some indicator lamps light up for varying
lengths of time.
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations: The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ Note
matic climate control is running.
Even if driving away was not intended, the de‐
▷ The passenger compartment has not yet activated engine starts up automatically in the
been heated or cooled to the required following situations:
level.
▷ Excessive warming of the passenger com‐
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ partment when the cooling function is
ature. switched on.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the ▷ The steering wheel is turned.
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
▷ After driving in reverse. position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ ▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
matic climate control is switched on. position is changed from P to N, D, R or
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. M/S.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked. ▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
▷ The parking assistant is activated. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
▷ Stop-and-go traffic. matic climate control is switched on.
▷ The transmission selector lever is in posi‐ ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.

tion N or M/S. ▷ Excessive cooling of the passenger com‐
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. partment when the heating is switched on.
▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐
Starting the engine cur, for example, if the brake pedal is de‐
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ pressed a number of times in succession.
lowing conditions:
▷ Manual transmission:
The clutch pedal is pressed.
66
Driving Controls
Activating/deactivating the system Malfunction

manually The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches of the engine automatically. A Check
Using the button Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked.
Parking brake
Applying
The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
Press the button. parking brake is set.
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is models
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop. Releasing
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an

automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
leaving it. Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
the lever down.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function Hints
is deactivated.
Use while driving
Transmission position P is engaged auto‐
matically. If on a rare occasion it is necessary to
use the parking brake while driving, do not use
excessive force when applying it. When using
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. it, keep the button on the lever depressed.
Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐
Automatic deactivation ing the parking brake may cause the rear
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐ wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, such as when the driver is detected to be To prevent corrosion and braking control on
absent. one side only, lightly apply the parking brake
67
Controls Driving
periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions Signaling briefly

permit. Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
The brake lamps will not light up if the parking it there for as long as you want the turn signal
brake is engaged. to flash.
High beams, headlamp flasher

Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
Do not fold in the exterior mirror while
driving and when the turn signals/warning
flashers are working, or else the additional
flasher lights in the exterior mirror will no lon‐
ger be in the prescribed position and will be ▷ High beams, arrow 1.
difficult to see.◀ ▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
Using turn signals

Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Do not switch on the wipers if they are
frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the
wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor
may be damaged.◀
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the No wiper operation on dry windshield
resistance point. Do not use the windshield wipers if the
windshield is dry, as this may damage the
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp wiper blades or cause them to become worn
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. more quickly.◀
Triple turn signal activation No wiper operation with wipers folded

Press the lever to the resistance point. away
The turn signal flashes three times. Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded
away, otherwise the hood or the wipers may be
The function can be activated or deactivated:
damaged.◀
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
68
Driving Controls
Switching on Intermittent operation or rain sensor
The concept
Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
Press the wiper levers up.
Activating/deactivating
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
The wipers switch to normal speed when
the vehicle is stationary.
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Switching off and brief wipe The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip‐
ing operation is started. If there is frost, wiper
operation is not started.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise,
damage could be caused by undesired wiper
activation.◀
Press the wiper levers down.

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
69
Controls Driving
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Fold-out position of the wipers

the rain sensor Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example.
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐
shield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.
Turn the thumbwheel.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
Clean the windshield, headlamps
Fold the wipers back down
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; other‐
wise, the wipers may become damaged when
they are switched on.◀

2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
move to their resting position and are
ready for operation.
Pull the wiper lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly. Washer fluid
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu‐ General information
lar intervals when the vehicle lights are
switched on. Antifreeze for washer fluid
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause
Do not use the washer system at freezing
injury if it is used incorrectly.
temperatures
Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
tion.
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this Only keep it in the closed original container
reason, use antifreeze. and inaccessible to children.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
empty; otherwise, you could damage the tainer.
pump.◀ United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
Windshield washer nozzles states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
70
Driving Controls
tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐ Manual transmission

centrate or the equivalent.◀
Shifting
Washer fluid reservoir Shifting into 5th or 6th gear
Adding washer fluid When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
Only add washer fluid when the engine is the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad‐
cool, and then close the cover completely to vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could
avoid contact between the washer fluid and lead to engine damage.◀
hot engine parts.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk Reverse gear
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance move the selector
lever in a dynamic movement to the left and
engage the reverse gear.
Automatic transmission with

Steptronic
Transmission positions
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir. D Drive, automatic position
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐ Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a ward gears are available.
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐
turer's recommendations. R is Reverse
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
the correct mixing ratio.
N is Neutral
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
water; this could damage the wiper system. vehicle can roll.
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ When the ignition is switched off, refer to
ferent manufacturers, because otherwise it can page 63, position P is engaged automatically.
result in clogging of the windshield washer
nozzles. P Park
Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
gal/1 liter. drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to
page 64, or when the ignition is switched
71
Controls Driving
off, refer to page 63, and when position R Engaging D, R and N

or D is engaged.
▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is en‐
gaged.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's
door is opened, and the brake pedal is not
pressed while the vehicle is stationary and
transmission position R or D is engaged.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi‐
tion P of the automatic transmission is en‐
gaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
roll. rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
Kickdown its center position.
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Engaging the transmission position

▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the
brake pedal is pressed.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be Press unlock button, in order to:
executed: shift lock. ▷ Engage R.
Depress the brake until you start ▷ Shift out of P.
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after Engaging P
you select a driving position, maintain
pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to start.◀
Press button P.
72
Driving Controls
Sport program and manual mode Sport automatic transmission: prevent

automatic upshifting in M/S manual
Activating the sport program mode
For vehicles with Sport automatic transmis‐
sions, automatic shift operations are not per‐
formed, at maximum engine speed for exam‐
ple, if one of the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC deactivated.
▷ TRACTION activated.
▷ SPORT+ activated.
In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
Push the selector lever to the right.
vated.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Activating the M/S manual mode Shift paddles

1. Push the selector lever to the left out of
transmission position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S
manual mode is automatically upshifted as The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
needed. you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
Switching to manual mode If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
ward. transmission temporarily switches to manual
mode.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards. If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle
is not accelerated for a certain time, the sys‐
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
tem switches back into automatic mode if the
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐
selector lever is in transmission position D.
sible if the engine speed is too high.
▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear. ▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
73
Controls Driving
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐ cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
sible if the engine speed is too high. lights up.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ 2. Engaging the transmission position S
strument cluster, followed by the current gear. 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
Displays in the instrument cluster 4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
The transmission position is dis‐ beyond the resistance point at the full
played, e.g.: P. throttle position.
A flag symbol appears in the instrument
cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
Sport automatic transmission: Launch 3 seconds, release the brake.
Control Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
The concept
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used
on surfaces with good traction. again.
Hints
Component wear
Do not use Launch Control too often;
otherwise, this may result in premature wear of
components due to the high stress placed on
the vehicle.◀
Did not use Launch Control during the break-

in, refer to page 166, period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Start with launch control

While the engine is running:
1. Press button or select with the

Driving Dynamics Control Sport+.
74
Displays Controls
Displays
Instrument cluster
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 80 5 Engine oil temperature 80

2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 82
3 Indicator/warning lamps 78 7 Electronic displays 77
4 Tachometer 80 8 Display/reset miles 81
75
Controls Displays
Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features
1 Fuel gauge 80 5 Engine oil temperature 80

2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 82
3 Indicator/warning lamps 78 7 Electronic displays 77
4 Tachometer 80 8 Display/reset miles 81
76
Displays Controls
Electronic displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Messages, e.g. Check Control 78 Miles/trip miles 81

Time 81 Computer 86
Date 81 2 Transmission display 74
External temperature 81 Gear shift indicator 83
Selection lists 85 3 Status, Driving Dynamics Control 118
Service requirements 82
77
Controls Displays
Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features
1 Time 81 Navigation display, see user's manual for

External temperature 81 Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
Date 81
2 Energy recovery 82
Selection list, e.g., radio 85
Transmission display 74
Speed limit detection 83
Current fuel consumption 82
Computer 86
ECO PRO 173
Miles/trip miles 81
3 Messages, e.g. Check Control 78
Service requirements 82
Check Control In addition, an acoustic signal may be output

and a text message may appear on the Control
The concept Display.
The Check Control system monitors functions
Indicator/warning lamps
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems. The indicator and warning lamps in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
A Check Control message is displayed as a
nations and colors.
combination of indicator or warning lamps and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in Several of the lamps are checked for proper
the Head-up Display. functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
78
Displays Controls
Overview: indicator/warning lamps Symbol Function or system
Symbol Function or system Safety belts.
Turn signal.
Airbag system.
Front fog lamps.

Steering system.
High beams.
Engine functions.
High-beam Assistant.
Parking brake.
Brake system.
Parking lamps, headlamp control.
In Canadian models
Parking brake.
Active Cruise Control.
Brake system.
ABS Antilock Brake System.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise
Control: collision warning.
ABS Antilock Brake System in
Pedestrian warning. Canadian models.
At least one Check Control mes‐

Speed limit, adjustable. sage is displayed or is stored (sym‐
bol in display).
Cruise control.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
Lane departure warning. in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
and warning lamps.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is a fault or the required action, can be called up
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Trac‐ via Check Control.
tion Control is activated.
The supplementary text of urgent messages is
Tire Pressure Monitor. automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Flat Tire Monitor.
79
Controls Displays
Symbols 3. "Check Control"

Depending on the Check Control message, the 4. Select the text message.
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual" Messages after trip completion
Display additional information about the Special messages that are displayed during
Check Control message in the Integrated driving are displayed again after the ignition is
Owner's Manual. switched off.
▷ "Service request"
Contact your service center. Fuel gauge
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
The vehicle inclination may
Contact Roadside Assistance. cause the display to vary.
US models: the arrow beside the
Hiding Check Control messages
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 180.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
Press the onboard computer button on the rupted to protect the engine.
turn signal lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐

played continuously and are not cleared
Engine oil temperature
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐ ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐ the low temperature end.
sages are displayed consecutively. Drive at moderate engine
These messages can be hidden for approx. and vehicle speeds.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ ▷ Normal operating tempera‐
played again automatically. ture: the pointer is in the
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden middle or in the left half of
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. the temperature display.
They are stored and can be displayed ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
again later. the temperature range. A Check Control
message is also displayed.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
80
Displays Controls
Coolant temperature Time

If the coolant along with the engine becomes The time is displayed at the bot‐
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. tom of the instrument cluster.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 203. Setting the time and time for‐
mat, refer to page 88.
Odometer and trip odometer

▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
Date
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. The date is displayed in the
computer.
Setting the date and date for‐
mat, refer to page 88.
Show/reset kilometers
Press the knob. Range
▷ When the ignition is After the reserve range is
switched off, the time, the reached:
external temperature and
▷ A Check Control message is
the odometer are displayed.
displayed briefly.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
▷ The remaining range is
odometer is reset.
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
External temperature as when cornering quickly, operation of the
engine is not always ensured.
External temperature warning
The Check Control message appears continu‐
If the indicator drops to
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds. Refuel promptly
A Check Control message is Refuel no later than at a range of
displayed. 30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is
There is an increased risk of ice on roads. not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Ice on roads Displaying the cruising range

Even at temperatures above 1. "Settings"
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on 2. "Info display"
roads.
3. "Additional indicators"
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and
The range is displayed in the instrument clus‐
shaded roads, for example, to avoid the in‐
ter.
creased risk of an accident.◀
81
Controls Displays
Current fuel consumption The current service requirements can be read

out from the remote control by the service
Instrument cluster specialist.
Displays the current fuel con‐ Display

sumption. You can check
Data regarding the service status or legally
whether you are currently driv‐
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
ing in an efficient and environ‐
matically transmitted to your service center
mentally-friendly manner.
before a service due date.
Instrument cluster with enhanced Detailed information on service

features requirements
Displays the current fuel con‐ More information on the scope of service re‐
sumption. You can check quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
whether you are currently driv‐ play.
ing in an efficient and environ‐
1. "Vehicle Info"
mentally-friendly manner.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Displaying the current fuel
consumption Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
1. "Settings"
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
2. "Info display"
tion.
3. "Additional indicators"
The bar display for the current fuel consump‐ Symbols
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Symbols Description
No service is currently re‐

Energy recovery quired.
The energy of motion of the ve‐
hicle is converted to electrical The deadline for service or a
energy while coasting. The vehi‐ legally mandated inspection is
cle battery is partially charged approaching.
and fuel consumption can be re‐
The service deadline has al‐
duced.
ready passed.
Service requirements Entering appointment dates

Enter the dates for the required inspections.
The concept
The driving distance or the time to the next
scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly in
the instrument cluster after the ignition is
switched on.
82
Displays Controls
Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set Manual transmission: displays
correctly.
Symbol Description
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status" Fuel efficient gear is engaged.
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection" Shift up to fuel efficient gear.
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
Shift down to fuel efficient gear.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Shift into neutral.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐
matically transmitted to your service center Automatic transmission: displays
before a service due date.
Example Description
You can check when your service center was
notified. Fuel efficient gear is engaged.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status" Shift into fuel efficient gear.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Gear shift indicator Speed limit detection with

No Passing Information
The concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐ The concept
cient gear for the current driving situation.
Speed limit detection
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and
the country-specific version of the vehicle, the Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the
gear shift indicator is active in the manual shape of a traffic sign to display the currently
mode of the automatic transmission and in the detected speed limit. The camera at the base
manual transmission. of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic
signs at the edge of the road as well as variable
Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra
the instrument cluster. symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the detected and compared with vehicle interior
engaged gear is displayed. data, such as for the rain sensor, and are dis‐
played depending on the situation. The system
takes into account the information stored in
83
Controls Displays
the navigation system and also displays speed Switching on/off

limits present on routes without signs. 1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
No Passing Information
3. "Speed limit information"
No Passing Information in the instrument clus‐
ter displays the beginnings and ends of no If speed limit detection is switched on, it can
passing zones detected by the camera. The be displayed on the info display in the instru‐
system accounts for only the beginnings and ment cluster via the onboard computer. No
ends of No Passing zones marked by signs. Passing Information is displayed together with
the activated speed limit information.
No display is shown:
▷ In countries where No Passing zones are Display
primarily identified with road markings.
The following is displayed in the instrument
▷ On routes without signage. cluster.
▷ Where there are railroad crossings, high‐
way markings or other situations where no Speed limit detection
signage is present, but passing would not
Current speed limit.
be permitted.
Hints
Personal judgment
The system cannot serve as a substitute Speed limit detection is not
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic available.
situation.
The system assists the driver and does not re‐
place the human eye.◀
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
At a glance the Head-up Display.
Camera No Passing Information

▷ Start of No Passing zone.
▷ End of No Passing zone.
▷ No Passing Information not
available.
No Passing Information can also be displayed

in the Head-up Display.
System limits
The camera is located near the base of the The system may not be fully functional and
mirror. may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ lowing situations:
terior rear view mirror clean and clear. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
84
Displays Controls
▷ When signs are concealed by objects. Display

▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you. Instrument cluster
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered by a sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem. Instrument cluster with enhanced
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, features
such as due to changes in the road net‐
work.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Selection lists in the Activating a list and creating the

instrument cluster setting
The concept
The following can be displayed or operated us‐
ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the
steering wheel and the display in the instru‐
ment cluster:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial on telephone.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
In addition, programs of the Driving Dynamics
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
Control are displayed.
list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ting and confirm it by pressing the thumb‐
wheel.
85
Controls Displays
Computer ▷ Arrow view of navigation system.

When destination guidance is activated in
Indication in the info display the navigation system.
The information from the on‐ When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis‐
board computer is shown in the play is inactive.
info display in the instrument ▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
cluster.
Adjusting the info display
You can select what information from the on‐
Calling up information on the info board computer is to be displayed on the info
display display of the instrument cluster.
1. "Settings"
2. "Info display"
3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
Press the onboard computer button on the with the remaining fuel.
turn signal lever. It is calculated based on your driving style over
Information is displayed on the info display of the last 20 miles/30 km.
the instrument cluster. If there is only enough fuel left for less than
45 miles/80 km, the color of the display
Information at a glance changes.
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
Average fuel consumption
signal lever calls up the following information
on the info display: The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period during which the engine is running.
▷ Range.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
▷ Average fuel consumption.
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
▷ Current fuel consumption. onboard computer.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date. Average speed
▷ Speed limit detection. Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped do not enter into the
▷ Time of arrival.
calculation of the average speed.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system. Resetting average values
▷ Distance to destination. Press and hold the computer button on the
When destination guidance is activated in turn signal lever.
the navigation system.
86
Displays Controls
Distance to destination Setting your current speed as the limit

The distance remaining to the destination is 1. "Settings"
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐ 2. "Speed"
gation system before the trip is started.
3. "Select current speed"
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
Time of arrival limit.
The estimated time of arrival is

Trip computer
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system The vehicle features two types of computer.
before the trip is started. ▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
The time must be correctly set. often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.
Speed limit detection
Description of the speed limit detection, refer Resetting the trip computer
to page 83, function.
1. "Vehicle Info"
Speed limit 2. "Trip computer"
Display of a speed limit which, when reached, 3. "Reset": all values are reset.
should cause a warning to be issued. "Automatically reset": all values are reset
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to
drops below the set speed limit once by at a standstill.
least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Display on the Control Display
Displaying, setting or changing the Display the onboard computer or trip computer
limit on the Control Display.
1. "Settings" 1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Speed" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is Resetting the fuel consumption or
displayed. speed
5. Press the controller. 1. "Vehicle Info"
The speed limit is stored. 2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
Activating/deactivating the limit 4. "Yes"
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning" Sport displays
4. Press the controller. In the Control Display, the current values for
power and torque can be displayed.
87
Controls Displays
Displaying sport displays in the Date

Control Display
1. "Vehicle Info" Setting the date
2. "Sport displays" 1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
Settings on the Control 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
Display displayed.
Time
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
Setting the time zone and year.
1. "Settings" The date is stored.
2. "Time/Date"
Setting the date format
3. "Time zone"
1. "Settings"
4. Select the desired time zone.
2. "Time/Date"
The time zone is stored.
3. "Format:"
Setting the time 4. Select the desired format.
1. "Settings" The date format is stored.
2. "Time/Date"
Language
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours Setting the language
are displayed. To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
2. "Language/Units"
nutes are displayed.
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format currently in use.
1. "Settings"
Setting the voice dialog
2. "Time/Date"
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
3. "Format:" refer to page 27.
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
88
Displays Controls
Units of measure Head-up Display

Setting the units of measure The concept
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
currently in use.
This system projects important information
Brightness into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
The driver can get information without averting
Setting the brightness his or her eyes from the road.
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1. "Settings" Display visibility

2. "Control display" The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
3. "Brightness" Display is influenced by the following factors:
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ ▷ Certain sitting positions.
ness is set. ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
5. Press the controller. play.
The setting is stored for the remote control ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
currently in use. ▷ Wet roads.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
ness control may not be clearly visible. If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐
tings.
Assist system information
Switching on/off
1. "Settings"
Information on the Assist system can be dis‐
2. "Head-Up Display"
played by activating Assist on the Control Dis‐
play. 3. "Head-Up Display"
1. "Settings" Display
2. "Control display"
3. "Driver assistance info" Overview
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Collision warning.
89
Controls Displays
▷ Speed limit detection. Setting the rotation

▷ Cruise control. 1. "Settings"
▷ Pedestrian warning. 2. "Head-Up Display"
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. 3. "Rotation"
Some of this information is only displayed 4. Turn the controller.
briefly as needed. The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display Special windshield
1. "Settings" The windshield is part of the system.
2. "Head-Up Display" The shape of the windshield makes it possible
3. "Displayed information" to display a precise image.
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
Display. ages from being displayed.
The settings are stored for the remote control Therefore, have the special windshield re‐
currently in use. placed by a service center only.
Setting the brightness

The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient light.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "Settings"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐
ditionally influenced using the instrument light‐
ing.
currently in use.

1. "Settings"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
currently in use.
90
Lamps Controls
Lamps
Vehicle equipment If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
All standard, country-specific and optional cally switched off at these switch settings.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Parking lamps
Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
for safety-related functions and systems. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, the vehicle battery may be‐
come discharged and it would then be impos‐
sible to start the engine.
At a glance
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
page 92.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
1 Rear fog lamps When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in
position or : parking and interior lamps
2 Front fog lamps come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked
3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive depending on the ambient light.
Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Wel‐
come lamps, Daytime running lights Activating/deactivating
4 Lamps off, daytime running lights 1. "Settings"
5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights 2. "Lighting"
6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam 3. "Welcome lights"
Assistant The setting is stored for the remote control
7 Instrument lighting currently in use.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature

Parking lamps/low beams, The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlamp flasher is switched on after the igni‐
headlamp control tion is switched off.
General information
Setting the duration
Switch position: 0, ,
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
91
Controls Lamps
3. "Pathway lighting:" Roadside parking lamps

4. Set the duration.
currently in use.
Automatic headlamp control

Switch position : the low beams are
switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐
nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on. Switching on
The low beams always stay on when the fog With the ignition switched off, press the lever
lamps are switched on. either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlamp control cannot Switching off
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
ment in determining when the lamps should be the opposite direction.
switched on in response to ambient lighting
conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect Adaptive Light Control
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually The concept
under these conditions.◀
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
Daytime running lights tion of the road surface.
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
ning lights light up in position 0, or . rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
After the ignition is switched off, the parking the course of the road.
lamps light up in position .
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, one of the two front fog lamps is
Activating/deactivating switched on as a corneringlamp. As a result
In some countries, daytime running lights are the inside of the curve is better lighted.
compulsory, so it may not be possible to deac‐
tivate the daytime running lights. Activating
1. "Settings" Switch position with the ignition switched
on.
2. "Lighting"
The cornering lamps are automatically
3. "Daytime running lamps"
switched on depending on the steering angle
The setting is stored for the remote control or the use of turn signals.
currently in use.
92
Lamps Controls
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐ The indicator lamp in the instrument
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐ cluster lights up.
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
When driving in reverse, only the cornering
tomatically brightened or dimmed.
lamp is active.
The system responds to light from oncoming
Malfunction traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
failed. Have the system checked as soon as ment cluster lights up when the system
possible. switches on the high beams. Depend‐
ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,
the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐
ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the
High-beam Assistant
areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case,
the blue indicator light will stay on.
The concept
When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐
tem automatically switches the high beams on Switching the high beams on and off
and off or suppresses the light in the areas that manually
blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐
trolled by a sensor on the front of the interior
rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the
high beams are switched on whenever the traf‐
fic situation allows. The driver can intervene at
any time and switch the high beams on and off
as usual.
Activating
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off

when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐
vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐
ton on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The High-beam Assistant can be activated Personal responsibility
when the low beams are switched on.
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
1. Turn the light switch to or . a substitute for the driver's personal judgment
2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, of when to use the high beams. Therefore,
arrow. manually switch off the high beams in situa‐
tions where this is required to avoid a safety
risk.◀
93
Controls Lamps
The system is not fully functional in situations If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
such as the following, and driver intervention page 92, is activated, the low beams will come
may be necessary: on automatically when you switch on the front
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, fog lamps.
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and Instrument lighting
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings. Adjusting
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐ The parking lamps or low beams
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ must be switched on to adjust
coming traffic on freeways. the brightness.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the Adjust the brightness using the
presence of highly reflective signs. thumbwheel.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ Interior lamps
ered with stickers, etc.
General information
Camera The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps
and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐
cally.
The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐
enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting.
The camera is located near the base of the

mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rear view mirror clean and clear.
1 Interior lamps
Fog lamps 2 Reading lamp
Front fog lamps Switching the interior lamps on and

The low beams must be switched on. off
Press the button. The green indicator Press the button.
lamp lights up.
94
Lamps Controls
To switch off permanently: press the button for

approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Reading lamps
Press the button.
Reading lamps are located at the front and rear

next to the interior lamps.
When the interior lamps are switched off per‐
manently, the reading lamps cannot be
switched on.
Ambient light
Depending on the equipment, the lighting can
be adjusted in the interior for some lights.
Selecting color scheme

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select the desired setting.
If the color scheme of the line is selected and
the welcome lamps are activated, the welcome
lamps are displayed in the color of the line
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Setting the brightness

The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐
justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
95
Controls Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Head airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in the head.
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint. Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
Side airbags impact.
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
96
Safety Controls
Protective action ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end This also applies to steering wheel covers,
collisions. the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
and the sides of the headliner.◀
Information on how to ensure the optimal
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
protective effect of the airbags
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. ruled out in certain situations.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at short-term and, in most cases, temporary
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
keep the danger of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐ In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
gered. and after triggering of the airbags
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐ Do not touch the individual components imme‐
jects between an airbag and a person. diately after the system has been triggered;
otherwise, there is the danger of burns.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
the service center or a workshop that has the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not
necessary authorization for handling explo‐
cover with adhesive labels or coverings,
sives.
and do not attach holders such as for navi‐
gation instruments and mobile phones. Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
undesired triggering of the airbag, either of
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
which could result in injury.◀
legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries
can occur if the front airbag is triggered. Warnings and information on the airbags are
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or also found on the sun visors.
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not approved specifically for seats Functional readiness of the airbag
with integrated side airbags. system
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as When the ignition is switched on, the
jackets, over the backrests. warning lamp in the instrument cluster
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads lights up briefly and thereby indicates
away from the side airbag and do not rest the operational readiness of the entire airbag
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries system and the belt tensioner.
can occur if the airbags are triggered.
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. ▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, cover them or modify ▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
them in any way.
97
Controls Safety
When there is a malfunction, have the ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
airbag system checked immediately or other items to the front passenger seat
When there is a malfunction, have the airbag unless they are specifically recommended
system checked immediately; otherwise, there by the manufacturer of your vehicle.
is a risk that the system does not function as ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
expected in the event of an accident despite passenger seat if a child restraint system is
corresponding severity of the accident.◀ to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
Automatic deactivation of the front could press against the seat from below.
passenger airbags ▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
The system determines whether the front pas‐
senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐ Indicator lamp for the front passenger
sistance of the human body. airbags
The front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger side are activated or deactivated
accordingly.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,
the front passenger airbags may not function
properly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
passenger seat bags indicates the operating state of the front
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ passenger airbags.
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
structions under Children on the front passen‐ tivated or deactivated.
ger seat.◀
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child who is properly
Malfunction of the automatic
seated in a child restraint fix‐
deactivation system
ing system intended for that
When transporting older children and adults, purpose is detected on the
the front passenger airbags may be deacti‐ seat or the seat is empty.
vated in certain sitting positions. In this case, The airbags on the front
the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ passenger side are not acti‐
bags lights up. vated.
In this case, change the sitting position so that ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
the front passenger airbags are activated and for example, a correctly seated person of
the indicator lamp goes out. sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
the person sit in the rear. tivated.
To make sure that the occupied seat cushion
can be evaluated correctly
98
Safety Controls
Detected child seats Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, especially in the child seats that The concept
were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was The system monitors tire pressure in the four
manufactured. After installing a child seat, mounted tires. The system warns you if there
make sure that the indicator lamp for the front is a significant loss of pressure in one or more
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire
that the child seat has been detected and the valves measure the tire inflation pressure.
front passenger airbags are not activated.
Hints
Strength of the driver's and front
passenger airbag Tire damage due to external factors
The strength with which the driver's and front Sudden tire damage caused by external
passenger airbags are triggered depends on influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀
the position of the driver's and front passenger Pay attention to the other information and indi‐
seats. cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer to
To maintain the accuracy of this function over page 187, as well when using the system.
the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a
corresponding message appears on the Con‐ Functional requirements
trol Display. The system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
Calibrating the front seats ble signaling of tire pressure loss is not en‐
A corresponding message appears on the sured.
Control Display. Reset the system again after each correction
1. Move the respective seat forward all the of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire
way. or wheel change.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. It Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
moves forward briefly. ensure that the system will operate properly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.

Status display
The calibration procedure is completed when
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
the message on the Control Display disap‐
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
pears.
play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration. 1. "Vehicle Info"
If the message does not disappear after a re‐ 2. "Vehicle status"

peat calibration, have the system checked as 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
soon as possible. The status is displayed.
Unobstructed area of movement
Status display
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury The tire and system status is indicated by the
or damage to objects.◀ color of the wheels and a text message on the
Control Display.
99
Controls Safety
All wheels green The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ drive away again, the reset resumes automati‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during cally.
the last reset.
Low tire pressure message
One wheel is yellow The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in Check Control message is displayed.
the indicated tire. ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
All wheels are yellow ▷ No reset was performed for the system.
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in The system therefore issues a warning
several tires. based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
for this may be: Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
▷ The system is being reset.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
▷ Malfunction. regular tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 197, are la‐
Carry out reset
beled with a circular symbol containing the
Reset the system after each correction of the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change. Do not continue driving without run-flat
tires
1. "Vehicle Info"
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
2. "Vehicle status" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
3. "Perform reset" may result in serious accidents.◀
4. Start the engine - do not drive away. When a low inflation pressure is indicated,
5. Carry out the reset with "Perform reset". DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
6. Drive away. if necessary.
The tires are shown in gray and the status is

Actions in the event of a flat tire
displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a Normal tires
short period, the tire inflation pressures set are
1. Identify the damaged tire.
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically during driving. Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
After a successfully completed Reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is correct, it is possible that a reset was not
active" is displayed. carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Then perform the reset.
100
Safety Controls
If an identification is not possible, please trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
contact the service center. greater depending on the driving speed, road
2. Rectify the flat tire. conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐
tem, may damage the TPM wheel elec‐ Continued driving with a flat tire
tronics. In this case, have the electronics Drive moderately and do not exceed a
checked at the next opportunity and have speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
them replaced if necessary.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
Run-flat tires duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
Maximum speed
properties.◀
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
Continued driving with a flat tire can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
could come loose and cause an accident. Do
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ not continue driving, and contact your service
vers. center.◀
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at Required inflation pressure check
the next opportunity. message
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires A Check Control message is displayed.
is correct, it is possible that a reset was not Check the tire inflation pressure and carry out
carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In a reset of the system.
that case, carry out a reset.
In some cases, a wheel was changed without
Possible driving distance with complete loss of having carried out a reset.
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire System limits
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load The system does not function properly if a re‐
and the driving style and conditions. set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
For a vehicle containing an average load, the reported even though the tire inflation pres‐
possible driving distance is approx. sures are correct.
50 miles/80 km. The tire pressure depends on the temperature
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g.,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ due to driving or because of the heat of the
duced lane stability during braking, a longer Sun, the tire inflation pressure increases also.
braking distance, and altered self-steering The tire pressure is reduced when the tire
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ temperature falls again. This behavior may
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ cause a warning to be issued if temperatures
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. fall very sharply.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
101
Controls Safety
Malfunction proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
even if under-inflation has not reached the
then lights up continuously. A Check
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
Display in the following situations: cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
have the service center check it if neces‐
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
sary.
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
your service center. nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
Reset the system again. function exists. When the malfunction indicator
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with is illuminated, the system may not be able to
the same radio frequency: after leaving the detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
area of the disturbance, the system auto‐ TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
matically becomes active again. reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
Declaration according to NHTSA/ that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
System tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
to continue to function properly.
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size FTM Flat Tire Monitor
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the The concept
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) The system detects a pressure loss on the ba‐
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has sis of speed differences between the individual
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring wheels while driving.
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when sponding wheel change. This is detected and
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you reported as a flat tire.
should stop and check your tires as soon as
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
tion pressure in the tires.
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the The system must have been initialized when
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐
102
Safety Controls
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐ 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after regular tires or run-flat tires.
every tire or wheel change. Run-flat tires, refer to page 197, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
Status display letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
Do not continue driving without run-flat
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
tires
whether or not the FTM is active.
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
1. "Vehicle Info" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
2. "Vehicle status" may result in serious accidents.◀
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)" When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
The status is displayed. bility Control is switched on if necessary.
Initialization System limits

The initialization process adopts the set infla‐ Sudden tire damage
tion tire pressures as reference values for the Sudden serious tire damage caused by
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
confirming the inflation pressures. vance.◀
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains. A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire
1. "Vehicle Info" inflation pressure regularly.
2. "Vehicle status" The system could be delayed or malfunction in
3. "Perform reset" the following situations:
4. Start the engine - do not drive away. ▷ When the system has not been initialized.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset". ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
6. Drive away.
▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive
The initialization is completed while driving,
wheels, high lateral acceleration.
which can be interrupted at any time.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Indication of a flat tire
Normal tires
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A 1. Identify the damaged tire.
Check Control message is displayed.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire four tires.
inflation pressure.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ have been initialized. In this case, initialize
vers. the system.
103
Controls Safety
If an identification is not possible, please Continued driving with a flat tire

contact the service center. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
2. Rectify the flat tire. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
Run-flat tires change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
Maximum speed braking distance and altered self-steering
You can continue driving with a damaged tire properties.◀
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Final tire failure
Continued driving with a flat tire Vibrations or loud noises while driving
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ could come loose and cause an accident. Do
vers. not continue driving, and contact your service
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. center.◀
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires Intelligent Safety
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize The concept
the system. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
Possible driving distance with complete loss of telligent Safety consists of one or more of the
tire inflation pressure: following systems, which can help to avoid an
imminent collision. These systems are active
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
automatically every time the engine is started
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
using the Start/Stop button:
and the driving style and conditions.
▷ Collision warning, refer to page 105.
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
possible driving distance is approx. ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 110.
50 miles/80 km.
Note
When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ Personal responsibility
duced lane stability during braking, a longer The system does not serve as a substi‐
braking distance, and altered self-steering tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ traffic situation.
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an
Because the possible driving distance de‐ accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
etc.
104
Safety Controls
At a glance Collision warning

Button in the vehicle Depending on how the equipment is equipped,
the collision warning system consists of one of
the two systems:
▷ Collision warning with City Braking func‐
tion, refer to page 105;
▷ Collision warning with braking function, re‐
fer to page 108
Collision warning with City

Intelligent Safety button Braking function
The concept
Camera The system can help to prevent accidents. If
an accident cannot be prevented, the system
helps to reduce the collision speed.
The system issues a warning if there is immi‐
nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde‐
pendently.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
The system is controlled via a camera in the
base of the mirror.
The camera is located near the base of the The collision warning is available even if cruise
mirror. control has been deactivated.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ When the vehicle is intentionally brought close
terior rear view mirror clean and clear. to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to
avoid false warnings.
Switching on/off
The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
General information
cally active after each engine start via the start/ The system issues a two-phase warning of a
stop button. danger of collision with vehicles at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these
Press the button: the systems are warnings may vary depending on the current
switched off. The LED goes out. driving situation.
Press the button: the systems are switched off. Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking inter‐
The LED lights up. vention occurs when appropriate.
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
105
Controls Safety
Detection range Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active every time
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Vehicles are observed when they are traveling Switching off

in the same direction of movement if they are The system is only switched off until the next
located within the detection range of the sys‐ time the engine is started with the Start/Stop
tem. button.
Press the button.
At a glance The LED goes out.
Button in the vehicle Switch the system back on: press the button
again.
Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1. "Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display.
Intelligent Safety button The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Camera Warning with braking function
Note
Adapting your speed and driving style
The warning does not relieve the driver
of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
Display
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way
The camera is located near the base of the is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
mirror. instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
106
Safety Controls
Symbol Measure System limits

Be alert
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
ing. Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
Increase braking and distance.
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
The vehicle flashes red and an ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ger of an accident occurring.◀
ing.
You are requested to intervene by Detection range
braking or making an evasive ma‐ The system's detection capabilities are limited.
neuver.
This may result in the warning not being is‐
sued or being issued late.
Braking intervention For example, the following situations may not
The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐ be detected:
tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brake
them at high speed.
booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently
strong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition, ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
if there is a risk of collision, the system can as‐ you or sharply decelerating vehicles.
sist with a slight braking intervention. The in‐ ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
speed to a complete stop.
▷ Pedestrians.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up until reaching a complete stop, the Functional limitations
engine may be shut down.
The system may not be fully functional in the
The braking intervention is executed only if following situations:
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
fall.
vated.
▷ In tight curves.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
moving the steering wheel. limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
OFF.
Tow-starting and towing
▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐
When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐ sor is dirty or obscured.
cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems;
otherwise, improper behavior of the braking
function of individual systems could result in
an accident.◀ ▷ If there is constant dimming because of
oncoming light, for example, from the sun
low in the sky.
107
Controls Safety
Prewarning sensitivity At a glance

Depending on the set prewarning time, this
may result in increased false warnings. Button in the vehicle
Collision warning with

braking function
The concept
The system issues a warning if there is immi‐
nent danger of a collision and also includes a
braking function.
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise Intelligent Safety button
Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is
controlled via the cruise control radar sensor in
conjunction with a camera. Camera
The collision warning is available even if cruise
control has been deactivated.
When the vehicle is intentionally brought close
to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to
avoid false warnings.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible danger of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time The camera is located near the base of the
of these warnings may vary depending on the mirror.
current driving situation. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
Detection range
Switching on/off
The system is automatically active every time
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Switching off
The system is only switched off until the next
It responds to stationary or moving objects time the engine is started with the Start/Stop
that are within the detection range of the radar button.
system.
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
108
Safety Controls
Switch the system back on: press the button Adapting your speed and driving style
again. The warning does not relieve the driver
Setting the warning time speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀
The warning time can be set via iDrive. The braking intervention can be interrupted by
pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively
1. "Settings"
moving the steering wheel.
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
Tow-starting and towing
3. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display. When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
an accident.◀
Display
Warning stages Display in the instrument cluster

The collision warning can be issued in the in‐
Prewarning strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and
This warning is issued, for example, when acoustically.
there is the impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Warning stages
Acute warning with braking function Symbol Measure

Warning of the imminent danger of a collision The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐
when the vehicle approaches another object at ing.
a relatively high differential speed. Increase distance.
The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐
vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is The vehicle flashes red and an
accompanied by a braking intervention. acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐
ing.
The braking intervention is executed with lim‐
ited braking force and for a brief period only. You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive ma‐
The intervention can bring the vehicle to a
neuver.
complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ The display does not relieve the driver of
vated. the responsibility to adapt his or her driving
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the braking
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
No automatic delay occurs.
109
Controls Safety
System limits Prewarning sensitivity

Be alert Depending on the set prewarning time, this
may result in increased false warnings.
Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ Pedestrian warning with city
ger of an accident occurring.◀ braking function
Detection range The concept

The system's detection capabilities are limited. The system can help to prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
This may result in the warning not being is‐
sued or being issued late. The system issues a warning in the city driving
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
For example, the following situations may not lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
be detected: function.
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach The system is controlled via the camera in the
them at high speed. base of the interior mirror.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you or sharply decelerating vehicles. General information
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. The system issues a warning with brightness
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. staring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.
35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk of
▷ Pedestrians.
collision with pedestrians and assists with a
brake intervention shortly before a collision.
Functional limitations
It responds to persons that are within the de‐
tection range of the system.
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ Detection range
fall.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
OFF.
▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐
sor is dirty or obscured.
▷ If there is constant dimming because of The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
oncoming light, for example, from the sun ided into two areas.
low in the sky. ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
110
Safety Controls
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ Switching off

cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
Press the button: the systems are
sued about pedestrians who are located within
switched off. The LED goes out.
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area. Press the button: the systems are switched off.
The LED lights up.
At a glance
Warning with braking function
Button in the vehicle
Note
The warning does not relieve the driver
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
Intelligent Safety button instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Camera
Intervene immediately by braking or
making an evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐
tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brake
booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently
strong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition,
The camera is located near the base of the if there is a risk of collision, the system can as‐
mirror. sist with a slight braking intervention. The in‐
tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow
speed to a complete stop.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up until reaching a complete stop, the
Switching on/off engine may be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if
The system is automatically active every time and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ vated.
ton.
111
Controls Safety
The braking intervention can be interrupted by ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
moving the steering wheel. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
Tow-starting and towing ately after vehicle shipment.
When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐ ▷ When it is dark outside.
function of individual systems could result in Lane departure warning
an accident.◀
The concept
System limits Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
Be alert
markings is about to leave the lane. This
Due to system limitations, warnings may speed, depending on the country version, is
be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or between 35 mph/55 km/h and
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and 45 mph/70 km/h.
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐
When switching on the system below this
ger of an accident occurring.◀
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Detection range
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
The detection capability of the camera is lim‐ the event of warnings. The time of the warning
ited. may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
This may result in the warning not being is‐ uation.
sued or being issued late. The system does not provide a warning if the
For example, the following situations may not turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
be detected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians. Notes
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such Personal responsibility
because of the viewing angle or contour. The system cannot serve as a substitute
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. for the driver's personal judgment of the
course of the road and the traffic situation.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐
ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐
Functional limitations cle.◀
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ If the camera view field or the front wind‐
shield are dirty or covered.
112
Safety Controls
At a glance ▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking was de‐

tected and warnings can be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
Lane departure warning
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
Camera ▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merg‐
ing, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
The camera is located near the base of the
mirror. ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
terior rear view mirror clean and clear. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
Switching on/off
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
Press the button. front of you.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
▷ Off: the LED goes out. rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐ ered with stickers, etc.
rently in use. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
113
Controls Safety
Active Blind Spot Detection At a glance
The concept Button in the vehicle
Two radar sensors below the rear bumper Active Blind Spot Detection
monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle
at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐ Radar sensors
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights
up dimly.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn

signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror
flashes and the steering wheel vibrates. The radar sensors are located under the rear
bumper.
Notes
Personal responsibility Switching on/off
The system does not serve as a substi‐ Press the button.
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an
accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀ The system can issue warnings at speeds
above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The state is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
114
Safety Controls
Display ▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
Information stage Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Warning Brake force display

If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
The concept
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
System limits
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
brake lamps light up.
much faster than your own.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
brake lamps light up in addition.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
For US owners only

part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
115
Controls Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle equipment ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the
vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine
All standard, country-specific and optional speed and by applying brakes to the individual
equipment that is offered in the model series is wheels.
ment is also described that is not available in a Adjust your driving style to the situation
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional An appropriate driving style is always the
equipment or country variant. This also applies responsibility of the driver.
for safety-related functions and systems. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
with DSC.
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
Antilock Brake System ABS margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Indicator/warning lamps
The vehicle remains steerable even during full The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
brake applications, thus increasing active trols the drive forces and brake forces.
safety.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ failed.
gine.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

Brake assistant When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system in bends.
automatically produces the maximum braking
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
force boost. This then reduces braking dis‐
again as soon as possible.
tance to a minimum during full braking. This
system utilizes all of the benefits provided by
ABS. Deactivating DSC
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal Press and hold the button, but not lon‐
for the duration of the full braking. ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.
DSC Dynamic Stability The DSC system is switched off.
Control
Activating DSC
The concept
Press the button.
DSC prevents traction loss in the driving
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
wheels when driving away and accelerating.
lamp go out.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub‐
116
Driving stability control systems Controls
Indicator/warning lamps Deactivating DTC

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ Press the button again.
played in the instrument cluster.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is tor lamp go out.
deactivated.
Above 31 mph/50 km/h DTC is automatically
deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction

Control xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
The concept
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
The DTC system is a version of the DSC in further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
which forward momentum is optimized. The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
The system ensures maximum forward mo‐ tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐ axles as demanded by the driving situation and
lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐ road surface.
ited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
ate caution. Dynamic Damping Control
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
The concept
under the following special circumstances:
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
snow-covered roads.
eling on uneven road surfaces.
▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in
The system enhances driving dynamics and
deep snow or on loose surfaces.
comfort as required for the road surface and
▷ When driving with snow chains. driving style.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Programs

Traction Control
The system offers several different programs.
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
The programs can be selected via the Driving
provides maximum traction on loose ground.
Dynamics Control, refer to page 118.
Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
SPORT
Activating DTC Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ SPORT+
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
OFF lights up. sorbers for greater driving agility when driving
with limited driving stabilization.
117
COMFORT/ECO PRO ▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐

Balanced control of the vehicle. TION or DSC OFF mode.
DSC OFF
Variable sport steering When DSC OFF, refer to page 116, is active,
driving stability is limited during acceleration
The variable sport steering increases the and when driving in bends.
steering angle of the front wheels at large
steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or TRACTION
when parking. Steering becomes more direct.
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
It also varies the force required to turn the maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed. Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 117, is
This results in a sporty steering response. In activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
addition, it becomes easier to steer during celeration and when driving in bends.
parking and maneuvering.
SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and
Driving Dynamics Control adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐
bilization.
The concept Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to
The driver handles several of the stabilization
adjust the certain characteristics of the vehicle.
tasks.
Various programs can be selected for this pur‐
pose. The Driving Dynamics Control and the
Activating SPORT+
DSC OFF buttons can each be used to activate
a program. Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT+ appears in the instrument
Operating the programs cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights
up.
Press the button Program
DSC OFF Automatic program change

TRACTION When activating cruise control, the program
automatically switches to SPORT mode.
SPORT+
SPORT Indicator/warning lamps
COMFORT SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
ECO PRO The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:
Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
Automatic program change
The system automatically switches to COM‐ SPORT
FORT in the following situations: Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Damping Control. and engine control for greater driving agility
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. with maximum driving stabilization.
118
Driving stability control systems Controls
The program can be configured to individual Comfort functions and the engine controller
specifications. The configuration is stored for are adjusted.
the remote control currently in use. The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Activating SPORT
Press button repeatedly until SPORT Activating ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster. Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
Configuring SPORT cluster.
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 119, the SPORT driving Configuring ECO PRO
mode can be set to individual specifications. 1. Activate ECO PRO.
▷ Activating SPORT. 2. "Configure ECO PRO"
▷ "Configure SPORT" Make the desired settings.
▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐ Configuring drive program
vated: Settings can be made for the following driving
programs in Driving mode:
1. "Settings"
▷ SPORT, refer to page 119.
2. "Driving mode"
▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 174.
3. "Configure SPORT"
4. Configure driving mode. Displays
This configuration is retrieved when the
SPORT driving mode is activated. Program selection
Pressing the button displays a
COMFORT list of the selectable programs.
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press button repeatedly until COM‐ Selected program
FORT is displayed in the instrument The selected program is dis‐
cluster. played in the instrument cluster.
In certain situations, the system automatically

changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 118.
ECO PRO
Program changes can be displayed on the
ECO PRO, refer to page 173, provides consis‐ Control Display.
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐ 1. "Settings"
zation.
119
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Driving mode info"
Drive-off assistant
This system supports driving away on gradi‐
ents. The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away
without delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
is being used, the vehicle may roll back
slightly.
Driving off without delay
After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin
rolling back.◀
120
Driving comfort Controls
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐
dients, but may not be maintained on uphill
All standard, country-specific and optional slopes if engine power is insufficient.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ General information
Depending on the set driving program, the
characteristics of the cruise control can
change in certain areas.
Hints
Active Cruise Control with Personal responsibility
Stop & Go function, ACC Even an active system does not release
the driver from personal responsibility for the
The concept driving process, especially for lane tracking,
adaptation of speed, distance and driving style
This system can be used to select a desired
to the traffic conditions.
speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐
cally on clear roads. Because of technical system limits, the system
cannot independently react appropriately in all
To the extent possible, the system automati‐
traffic situations.
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle
ahead of you. Monitor the driving process, the surrounding
area and what is occurring in traffic continu‐
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the
ously and attentively and actively intervene as
vehicle ahead of you can be varied.
required, e.g., by braking, steering or making
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. an evasive maneuver.◀
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically reduces the speed, applies the Unfavorable weather conditions
brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐ In the event of unfavorable weather and
cle ahead begins moving faster. light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall,
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer
system is able to detect this within the given recognition of vehicles and lane limits as well
system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your as short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is already detected. Drive attentively, and react to
able to accelerate if operated accordingly. the current traffic events. Intervene actively
when necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or
Even if some time passes before the vehicle
making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there
ahead of you drives away again, your own vehi‐
is danger of an accident.◀
cle can still be accelerated automatically and
simply.
As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to
the desired speed.
121
Controls Driving comfort
At a glance
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press the Function

button
System on/off, interrupt, refer to

page 122
Maintaining/storing the speed, A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐
refer to page 123 tection of vehicles.
Resume speed, refer to ▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐
page 124 move layers of snow and ice carefully.
Reduce distance, refer to ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar
page 124 sensor.
Increase distance, refer to Switching on/off and interrupting

page 124 cruise control
Rocker switch:
Switching on
Maintaining/storing the speed,
refer to page 123 Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Changing, maintaining, and
storing the speed, refer to The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
page 123 light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
The arrangement of the buttons varies accord‐ Cruise control can be used.
ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun‐
try-specific variants. Switching off
Radar sensor Deactivated or interrupted system
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper If the system is deactivated or inter‐
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering
vehicle. and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
curring.◀
If switching off the system while stationary,

press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Press the button.
▷ If active: press twice.

▷ If interrupted: press once.
122
The displays go out. The stored desired speed

and distance are deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
If interrupting the system while stationary,

press on the brake pedal at the same time.
The system is automatically interrupted in the Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
following situations: terrupted.
▷ When the brakes are applied.
When the system is switched on, the current
▷ When transmission position D is disen‐
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
gaged.
speed.
▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly
activated or DSC is deactivated.
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. the instrument cluster, refer to page 125.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving When cruise control is maintained or stored,
Dynamics Control. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are if necessary.
opened when the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for Changing, maintaining, and storing
an extended period, e.g., on a road with the speed
very little traffic without road edge line The rocker switch can be pressed while the
markings. system is interrupted to maintain and store the
▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐ current speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control
rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog. is switched on, if necessary.
Adapting the desired speed
Maintaining/storing the speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
Press the button. ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
Or: curring.◀
Speed differences
Large differences in speed relative to ve‐
hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen‐
sated by the system for example in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ When catching up rapidly with a truck.
▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves
into the wrong lane.◀
123
The selected distance, refer to page 125, is

displayed in the instrument cluster.
Calling up the desired speed and

distance
While driving
Press the button with the system
switched on.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set. In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
▷ When the system is switched off.
vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear. ▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to

While standing
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx. Before leaving the vehicle, secure it
1 mph/1 km/h. against rolling
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐
past the point of resistance, the desired ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mission and apply the parking brake. Other‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the The system brought the vehicle to a complete
action. standstill.
▷ Green marking in the speedometer:
Distance
Your vehicle accelerates automatically as
Selecting a distance soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐
Adjust the distance according to the traf‐ dar sensor moves off.
fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is ▷ Marking in the speedometer turns orange:
the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain no automatic driving away.
the prescribed safety distance.◀
To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐
matically, press the accelerator or press
Reduce distance the RES or SET button.
Press the button repeatedly until the Rolling bars in the distance display indicate
desired distance is set. that the vehicle in the radar sensor detection
range has moved off.
The selected distance, refer to page 125, is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing
on the brake pedal and it is standing behind
another vehicle:
Increase distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
1. Press the button to call up a stored
desired distance is set.
desired speed.
124
2. Release the brake pedal. Distance display

3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press
The system has been interrupted or
the RES rocker switch when the vehicle
distance control is deactivated be‐
ahead of you drives away.
cause the accelerator pedal is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Distance control is deactivated be‐
Desired speed cause the accelerator pedal is being
▷ The marking lights up green: pressed; a vehicle was detected.
the system is active. Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
▷ The marking lights up or‐ away.
ange: the system has been
interrupted.
Indicator/warning lamps
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off. Personal responsibility
The indicator and warning lamps do not
relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt
Brief status display his or her desired driving speed and style to
Selected desired speed. the traffic conditions.◀
The vehicle symbol lights up orange:

If --- appears briefly on the display for Check A vehicle has been detected ahead of
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ you.
tem requirements for operation are currently
not met. The vehicle symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for
Distance to vehicle ahead of you operating the system.
The selected distance to the vehicle driving The system was deactivated but applies the
ahead of you is shown. brakes until you actively resume control by
Distance display pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Distance 1
The vehicle symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
Distance 2 You are requested to intervene by
braking or making an evasive maneuver.
Distance 3
System limits
Distance 4 Speed range

This value is set after the system is Best results are achieved when using the sys‐
switched on. tem on well-developed roads and highways.
The system is functional at speeds beginning
at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
125
The maximum speed that can be set depends No warnings

on the vehicle. A warning may not be issued when ap‐
The system can also be activated when sta‐ proaching a stationary or very slow-moving ob‐
tionary. stacle. You must react yourself; otherwise,
Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐ there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
uation when using the system.
Swerving vehicles
Detection range
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected

The detection capacity of the system and the until it is completely within the same lane as
automatic braking capacity are limited. your vehicle.
Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
for instance might not be detected. Swerving vehicles
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
Limited detection capacity swerves into your lane, the system may not be
Because of the limits to the detection ca‐ able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
pacity of the camera and the sensor, you tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
should be alert at all times so that you can in‐ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
Deceleration vers, if necessary. You must react yourself;
The system does not decelerate when a sta‐ otherwise, there is the danger of an accident
tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, occurring.◀
e.g., a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end
of traffic congestion.
The system also does not respond to:
▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road
users.
▷ Red traffic lights.
▷ Stationary objects.
▷ Cross traffic.
▷ Oncoming traffic.
126
Unexpected lane change
When approaching a curve, the system may

react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves
to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of
into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐
the vehicle by the system can be compensated
cle, you yourself must react, as the system
for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator
does not react to stopped vehicles.
pedal is released, the system becomes active
again and independently controls the speed.
Cornering
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or
behind bumps in the road.
Radar sensor
For US owners only

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
curves cannot be anticipated in advance. erned by the following:
Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate
FCC ID:
speed.
▷ OAYARS3-A
In tight curves, situations may result due to the
restricted detection range of the system in Compliance statement:
which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
be detected at all, or not until after a consider‐ Rules. Operation is subject to the following
able delay. two conditions:
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
127
Malfunction At a glance
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be Buttons on the steering wheel
caused by damage incurred during parking, for
example. Press the button Function
A Check Control message is displayed if the System on/off, interrupt
system fails.
Store speed
Cruise control
Resume speed
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning Rocker switch: change,
at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. hold, store speed
It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel. Controls
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient. Switching on
Unfavorable conditions Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Do not use the system if unfavorable
conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐ The marking in the speedometer is set to the
stant speed, for instance: current speed.
▷ On curvy roads. Cruise control can be used.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or Switching off
on a loose road surface. Deactivated or interrupted system
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐ If the system is deactivated or inter‐
cle and cause an accident.◀ rupted, actively intervene by braking and, if
necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise,
General information there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀
Depending on the set driving program, the Press the button.
characteristics of the cruise control can
change in certain areas.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting
When active, press the button.
The system is automatically interrupted if:
128
▷ The brakes are applied. Adapting the desired speed

▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐ ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐
gaged. erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐
▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐ curring.◀
rent speed.
▷ The transmission position D is disengaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
Maintaining/storing the current speed

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
Press the button. until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
Or vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is
clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ The maximum speed that can be set de‐
terrupted. pends on the vehicle.
When the system is switched on, the current ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
speed is maintained and stored as the desired ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
speed. celerates the vehicle without requiring
It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly pressure on the accelerator pedal. After
displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the rocker switch is released, the vehicle
the speedometer, refer to page 130. maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
When cruise control is maintained or stored, the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Resuming the desired speed
Changing/maintaining speed Press the button.
The rocker switch can be pressed while the
system is interrupted in order to maintain and The stored speed is reached and maintained.
store the current speed.
129
Displays in the instrument cluster ▷ By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
Indicator lamp ▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ 5 ft/1.50 m.
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ To ensure full operability:
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ ▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., by stickers, bi‐
tem is switched on. cycle racks and the like.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
Desired speed ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
▷ The marking lights up green: spray the sensors for long periods and
the system is active. maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been Hints
interrupted. Personal responsibility
▷ The marking does not light up: the system Even an active system does not relieve
is switched off. the driver from personal responsibility for the
driving process.
Brief status display Because of technical system limits, the system
cannot independently react appropriately in all
Selected desired speed.
traffic situations.
Continuously and attentively monitor the driv‐
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check ing process, the area surrounding the vehicle
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ and the traffic situation, and actively intervene
tem requirements for operation are currently when required, otherwise, there is a risk of an
not met. accident.◀
Avoid driving quickly with PDC

PDC Park Distance Control Avoid approaching an object quickly.
Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
The concept active.
PDC supports you when parking. Objects that For technical reasons, the system may other‐
you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐ wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
hind your vehicle are indicated with:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
Measurements are made by ultrasound sen‐
sors in the bumpers.
The range, depending on the environment, is
approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given:
130
At a glance Display
Button in the vehicle Signal tones

When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of
the object. For example, if an object is de‐
tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal
tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object be‐
comes, the shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
PDC Park Distance Control sounded.
If objects are located both in front of and be‐
hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig‐
Switching on/off nal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off:
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
Select transmission position R with the engine
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
running.
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel Volume
The system switches off when a certain driving The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted,
distance or speed is exceeded. refer to user's manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually currently in use.
Press the button. Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object can
▷ On: the LED lights up. be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
▷ Off: the LED goes out. are farther away are displayed on the Control
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, Display before a signal tone sounds.
the rearview camera, refer to page 133, can be A display appears as soon as Park Distance
switched on. Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
Switching on the rearview camera via colors red, green and yellow.
the iDrive
If the rearview camera image was selected last,
With PDC activated or Top View switched on: it again appears on the display. To switch to
"Rear view camera" PDC:
The rearview camera image is displayed. The 1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ on the Control Display.
rently in use.
131
2. Press the controller. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in

The setting is stored for the remote control ice.
currently in use. ▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
System limits
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in
rages.
the following circumstances:
▷ In heavy exhaust.
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
coats.
cleaners or neon lights.
▷ If there is an external disturbance of the ul‐
The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐
trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or
ous tone alternating between the front and
loud machines.
rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction
▷ When sensors are soiled, iced over or dam‐ due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐
aged. ger present, the system is again fully func‐
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., tional.
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall or
strong wind. Malfunction
▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of other A Check Control message is displayed.
vehicles. The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. area on the Control Display.
▷ With moving objects. PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as To ensure full operability:
ledges or cargo. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure, spray the sensors for long periods and
such as fences. maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before Surround View
or after a continuous tone sounds.
The concept
False warnings Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
PDC may issue a warning under the following
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
conditions even though there is no obstacle
and intersections.
within the detection range:
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 133
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ Side View, refer to page 135.
▷ Top View, refer to page 136.
132
Rearview camera Camera
The concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Hints
Check the traffic situation as well
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
trunk lid. The image quality may be impaired
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
by dirt.
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
cated outside the picture area of the backup Clean the lens, refer to page 226.
camera.◀
Switching on/off
At a glance
Button in the vehicle Select transmission position R with the engine
running.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
system was switched on via the iDrive.

travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Rearview camera
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.

The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
Switching on the rearview camera via

the iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
133
The rearview camera image is displayed. The Turning circle lines

setting is stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Activating the assistance functions ▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐
More than one assistance function can be ac‐ age.
tive at the same time. ▷ Show the course of the smallest possible
▷ Parking aid lines turning circle on a level road.
"Parking aid lines" ▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed af‐
Pathway and turning circle lines are dis‐ ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐
played. tain angle.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking" Obstacle marking
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed. General information
Pathway lines
Marks for detected obstacles can be shown in

the rearview camera image.
▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐
age when in drive mode R. Their colored steps match the markings of the
PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance
▷ Help you to estimate the space required to the object shown.
when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
▷ Are dependent on the current steering an‐
gle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
134
Parking using pathway and turning System limits

circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir‐ Detection of objects
cle lines lead to within the limits of the Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
parking space. objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to
page 130.
The objects displayed in the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the
distance from the objects on the display.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning circle line. Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐
cle record the traffic situation on each side.
Display settings Notes

The images from both cameras are shown si‐
Brightness multaneously on the Control Display.
With the rearview camera switched on: Check the traffic situation as well
1. Select the symbol. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting hicle on blind driveways and intersections with
is reached, and press the controller. your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could
result from road users or objects located out‐
Contrast side the picture area of the Side View cam‐
eras.◀
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
135
At a glance Switch the system back on if necessary.
Button in the vehicle Display

The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Side View
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show

Cameras the position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1. "Brightness"
Contrast
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐ With the Side View switched on:
ture the image.
1. "Contrast"
The two camera lenses are located on the
sides of the bumper. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the lens, refer to page 226. System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of
Switching on/off 330 ft/100 m.
Switching on/off manually

Press the button. Top View
The concept
Automatic deactivation during forward Top View provides assistance in parking and
travel maneuvering. The area around the doors and
The system switches off when a certain driving the road area around the vehicle are shown on
distance or speed is exceeded. the Control Display for this purpose.
136
General information Cameras

The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
backup camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and
rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the
exterior mirrors are detected early.
Notes
The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐
cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ ings. The image quality may be impaired by
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ dirt.
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
Clean the lens, refer to page 226.
cated outside the picture area of the
cameras.◀
Switching on/off
At a glance
Button in the vehicle Select drive mode R with the engine running.
The Top View and PDC images are displayed if
the system is switched on via iDrive.

travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Top View Switching on/off manually

Press the button.

Top View is displayed.
Switching on the backup camera via

the iDrive
With Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
137
The backup camera image is displayed. The Displaying the turning circle and
setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ pathway lines
rently in use. ▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle
Display when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
Visual warning
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
The approach of the vehicle to an object can you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
be shown on the Control Display. tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
When the distance to an object is small, a red The lane line depends on the engaged
bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in drive mode and the current steering angle.
the PDC display. The track line is continuously adjusted for
the steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ With a door open.
The display appears as soon as Top View is ▷ With the trunk lid open.
activated. ▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
If the rearview camera image was selected last, ▷ In poor light.

it again appears on the display when reverse A Check Control message is displayed in some
gear is selected. To switch to Top View: of these situations.
"Rear view camera" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
Parking assistant
currently in use.
The concept
Brightness

Contrast
This system assists the driver in parking paral‐
lel to the road.
138
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces Curbs

on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐ cle over or onto curbs.
sible parking line and takes control of steering Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
during the parking procedure. vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐
When parking, also take note of the visual and cle may become damaged.◀
acoustic information and instructions issued
An engine that has been switched off by the
by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
view camera and react accordingly.
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 130. Requirements
Hints For measuring parking spaces

Personal responsibility ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
Even an active system does not relieve prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
the driver from personal responsibility for the ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
driving process. cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Because of technical system limits, the system
cannot independently react appropriately in all Suitable parking space
traffic situations. ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
Continuously and attentively monitor the driv‐ length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
ing process, the area surrounding the vehicle ▷ Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle's
and the traffic situation, and actively intervene length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m.
when required, otherwise, there is a risk of an ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
accident.◀
Changes to the parking space For parking procedure

Changes to the parking space after it was ▷ Doors and trunk lid closed.
measured are not taken into account by the ▷ Parking brake released.
system. ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐ must be set where applicable.
dent occurring.◀
Transporting loads
Loads that extend beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle are not taken into account by the
system during the parking procedure.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐
dent occurring.◀
139
At a glance Switching on with the reverse gear

Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Activate: "Parking Assistant" Select the
symbol in the Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press the button.
▷ Switch off the ignition.

Parking assistant

Ultrasound sensors
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.

White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking Status display

spaces are located on the wheel arches. Depending on the appointment version, differ‐
To ensure full operability: ent views of the status display are shown and
are described below as View 1, refer to
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
page 140, or View 2, refer to page 141.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and Status of the system, Display 1
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Switching on/off
Switching on with the button

Press the button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search

is indicated on the Control Display. The status is displayed with symbols.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
140
Gray: parking space search. road as on the Control Display. When the
Blue: the system is activated. A parking assistant is active, suitable parking
suitable parking space was spaces are highlighted.
found. ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
The parking procedure is active. been seized.
Steering control has been
seized.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forwards
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
Status of the parking space search activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant

Loud sounds outside and within the vehi‐
cle can drown out the signal tones of the park‐
ing assistant and PDC.
Check the traffic situation around the vehicle
▷ Gray, arrow 1: parking space search. with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the
▷ Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable. danger of an accident.◀
The vehicle is parked in the parking space 1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐
if the parking procedure is active. vate it if necessary.
▷ No display: no parking space search. The status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
Status of the system, Display 2
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
To achieve the best possible parking posi‐
tion, wait for the automatic steering wheel
movement as required after the gear
change when the vehicle is stationary.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐
essary.
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side
of the vehicle representation. Parking as‐
sistant is activated and search for parking
Interrupting manually
space active. The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ Suitable parking spaces are displayed next
to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the
141
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
on the Control Display. roads.
▷ Press the button. ▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ When leaves or snow has collected in the
Interrupting automatically
parking space.
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations: Limits of ultrasonic measurement
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
he takes over steering. cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the following circumstances:
the instruction on the Control Display. ▷ For small children and animals.
▷ If a turn signal is activated in the opposite ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
direction to the desired side for parking. coats.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. ▷ If there is an external disturbance of the ul‐
6 mph/10 km/h. trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces loud machines.
if necessary. ▷ When sensors are soiled, iced over or dam‐
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to aged.
overcome, such as curbs. ▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g.,
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly high relative humidity, rain, snowfall or
arise. strong wind.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of other
or the time taken for parking is exceeded. vehicles.
A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
Continuing
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ ledges or cargo.
tinued if necessary.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure,
to do this.
such as fences.
System limits ▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
No parking assistance move into the blind area of the sensors before
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ or after a continuous tone sounds.
tance in the following situations: The parking assistant may identify parking
▷ In tight curves. spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Functional limitations Malfunction

The system may not be fully functional in the A Check Control message is displayed.
142
The parking assistant failed. Have the system

checked.
143
Controls Climate control
Climate control
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 52 6 Temperature

2 Vent settings 7 Seat heating, right 52
3 Rear window defroster 8 Cooling function
4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode
5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor
144
Climate control Controls
Climate control functions in detail The cooling function, refer to page 145, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
Manual air distribution gram.
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
Temperature
termediate setting. Turn the wheel to set the de‐
sired temperature.
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
The automatic climate control reaches this
▷ Windows, upper body region, and foot‐
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
well.
sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐
▷ Footwell. put, and then keeps it constant.
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐
Defrosting windows and removing perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
condensation mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐ just the set temperature.
crease the air flow and temperature, and, if
necessary, use the cooling function. Cooling function
The passenger compartment can only be
Rear window defroster cooled with the engine running.
Press the button.
Press the button.
The rear window defroster switches
The air is cooled and dehumidified
off automatically after a certain period of time.
and, depending on the temperature setting,
warmed again.
Air flow, manual
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
Press the left or right side of the but‐ fog up briefly when the engine is started.
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
The air flow of the air conditioner may be re‐ cally with the AUTO program.
duced automatically to save battery power. When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 168, devel‐
AUTO program ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Press the button.
Recirculated-air mode
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically. You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
Depending on the selected temperature and rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
outside influences, the air is directed to the system then recirculates the air currently
windshield, side windows, upper body, and within the vehicle.
into the footwell. Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode:
145
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. Switching on

▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply Press any button except
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ ▷ Rear window defroster.
nently blocked.
▷ Seat heating.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if nec‐ Microfilter
essary.
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
Continuous recirculated-air mode crofilter filters dust and pollen out of the air.
The recirculated-air mode should not be This filter should be replaced during scheduled
used for an extended period of time, as the air maintenance, refer to page 204, of your vehi‐
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐ cle.
ily.◀
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
Press the left button for the minimum
speed.
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 52 3 AUTO program

2 Temperature, left 4 Display
146
5 Maximum cooling 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity

6 Temperature, right 12 Air distribution, left
7 Seat heating, right 52 13 Rear window defroster
8 Cooling function 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ clear
lated-air mode 15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
10 Air distribution, right sation
Climate control functions in detail Intensity of the AUTO program

With the AUTO program switched on, auto‐
Temperature matic control of the air flow and air distribution
Turn the wheel to set the de‐ can be adjusted.
sired temperature. Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.
The automatic climate control reaches this The selected intensity is shown on the display
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐ of the automatic climate control.
sary by increasing the cooling or heating out‐
put, and then keeps it constant. Maximum cooling
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ Press the button.
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ The system is set to the lowest tem‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ perature, maximum air flow and air circulation
just the set temperature. mode.
AUTO program Air flows out of the vents for the upper body
region. The vents need to be open for this.
Press the button.
The function is available above an external
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
ture are controlled automatically.
engine running.
Depending on the selected temperature, The air flow can be adjusted when the program
AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐ is active.
ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the footwell. Cooling function
The cooling function, refer to page 147, is The passenger compartment can only be
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ cooled with the engine running.
gram.
Press the button.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
The air is cooled and dehumidified
trols the program so as to prevent window
and, depending on the temperature setting,
condensation as much as possible.
warmed again.
147
Depending on the weather, the windshield may ▷ Footwell.

fog up briefly when the engine is started. ▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐ ▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell:
cally with the AUTO program. driver's side only.
When using the automatic climate control, If the windows are fogged over, press the
condensation water, refer to page 168, devel‐ AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle. sor.
Automatic recirculated-air control/ Air flow, manual

recirculated-air mode
To be able to manually adjust the air flow,
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ switch off the AUTO program first.
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The Press the left or right side of the but‐
system then recirculates the air currently ton: decrease or increase air flow.
within the vehicle.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
Press the button repeatedly to select the automatic climate control.
an operating mode: The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
power.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the Rear window defroster
outside air and controls the shutoff auto‐
matically. Press the button.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the The rear window defroster switches
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ off automatically after a certain period of time.
manently blocked.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the Defrosting windows and removing
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO condensation
button to utilize the condensation sensor. Press the button.
Make sure that air can flow onto the wind‐
shield. Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
Continuous recirculated-air mode windows.
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used for an extended period of time, as the air The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐
quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐ gram is active.
ily.◀ If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
Manual air distribution
sor.
Press the button repeatedly to select
a program:
▷ Upper body region.

▷ Upper body region and footwell.
148
Switching the system on/off Adjusting the ventilation

▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Switching off
Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐
Press the left button for the minimum rection, such as if the vehicle interior is hot
speed. from the sun.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Switching on Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Press any button except
▷ Rear window defroster. Ventilation in the rear
▷ Seat heating.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance, refer to page 204, of your vehi‐
cle.
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1.
Ventilation ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 2.
Front ventilation Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
arrow 1. cle interior and lowers its temperature, if nec‐
essary.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2. The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐ ing two preset switch-on times. It remains
row 3. switched on for 30 minutes.
Toward blue: colder. Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Toward red: warmer.
149
Switching on/off directly

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the switch-on time

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the switch-on time

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
150
Interior equipment Controls
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment ally compatible with the universal garage door
opener.
If you have any questions, please contact:
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ▷ Your service center.
ment is also described that is not available in a ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
equipment or country variant. This also applies HomeLink is a registered trademark of John‐
for safety-related functions and systems. son Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview

Universal garage door mirror
opener
The concept
The universal garage door opener can operate
up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The universal garage door opener re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror must be program‐ ▷ LED, arrow 1.
med with the desired functions. The hand-held ▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
transmitter for the particular system is required
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
in order to program the remote control.
quired for programming.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐ Programming
ing a device using the integrated universal re‐
mote control, ensure that there are no people, General information
animals, or objects in the range of movement
of the remote-controlled device; otherwise,
there is a risk of injury or damage. 2. Initial setup:
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- Press and hold the left and right button on
held transmitter.◀ the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
functions for the sake of security. erases all programming of the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror.
Compatibility
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
ing or in the instructions of the system 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior
to be controlled, the system is gener‐
151
Controls Interior equipment
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
pends on the manual transmitter. peat for approximately 20 seconds.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button For systems with an alternating-code system,
of the desired function on the hand-held the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
transmitter and the button to be program‐ tem also have to be synchronized.
med on the interior rearview mirror. The Please read the operating manual of the sys‐
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ tem being set up for information on how to
gin flashing slowly. synchronize the system.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
flashes more rapidly. When the LED is ond person.
flashing faster, this indicates that the but‐
To synchronize:
ton on the interior rearview mirror has been
programmed. 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
If the LED does not flash faster after at mote-controlled system.
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 2. Program the relevant button on the interior
tween the interior rearview mirror and the rearview mirror as described.
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
Several more attempts at different distan‐ on the system being programmed. You
ces may be necessary. Wait at least have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
15 seconds between attempts.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
Canada: if programming with the hand- interior rearview mirror for approximately
held transmitter was interrupted, hold 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
down the interior rearview mirror button repeat this work step up to three times in
and repeatedly press and release the order to finish synchronization. Once syn‐
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ chronization is complete, the programmed
onds. function will be carried out.
6. To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. Reprogramming individual buttons
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ 1. Switch on the ignition.
rior rearview mirror buttons. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
button to be programmed.
Special feature of the alternating-
3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
code wireless system
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
If you are unable to operate the system after transmitter for the system to be controlled
repeated programming, please check if the approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
system to be controlled features an alternat‐ buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The
ing-code system. required distance depends on the manual
Read the system's operating manual, or press transmitter.
the programmed button on the interior rear‐ 4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior desired function on the hand-held trans‐
rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then mitter.
stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
features an alternating-code system. Flashing 5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐
idly. When the LED is flashing faster, this
152
indicates that the button on the interior Digital compass

rearview mirror has been programmed.
The system can then be controlled by the At a glance
button on the interior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
1 Control button
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds. 2 Mirror display
Controls Mirror display

Before operation The point of the compass is displayed in the
Before operating a system using the mirror when driving straight.
integrated universal remote control, ensure
that there are no people, animals, or objects Operating concept
within the range of movement of the remote- Various functions can be called up by pressing
controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of the control button with a pointed object, such
injury or damage. as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- The following setting options are displayed in
held transmitter.◀ succession, depending on how long the con‐
trol button is pressed:
The system, such as the garage door, can be
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
the button within receiving range of the system ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ setting.
view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
nal is being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
Press and hold the left and right button on the
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
fer to World map with compass zones.
proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
153
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the
set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle.
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
number of the compass zone correspond‐ 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
ing to your location appears in the mirror. prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ on the display. Next, drive in a complete
pass is ready for use again after approximately circle at least once at a speed of no more
10 seconds. than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
Calibrating the digital compass the compass.
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following: Left/right-hand steering
▷ The wrong point of the compass is dis‐ The digital compass is already set for right or
played. left-hand steering at the factory.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
Setting the language
not change despite changing the direction
of travel. Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
button again to switch between English "E"
played.
and German "O".
154
The setting is stored automatically after ap‐

proximately 10 seconds.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Opening
The lighter is located next to the ashtray.
Push in the lighter.

The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical
Raise cover.
devices
Emptying Hints
Take out the insert. Do not plug chargers into the socket
Do not connect battery chargers to the
Lighter
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this
Danger of burns may damage the battery.◀
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐
Replace the cover after use
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
control with you when leaving the vehicle so
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
themselves.◀
Sockets
Replace the cover after use The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter ning or when the ignition is switched on. The
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
155
Front center console In the cargo area
Raise the cap and remove the cover or ciga‐ The socket is located on the left side in the
rette lighter. cargo area.
In the front passenger footwell

USB interface for data
transfer
The concept
Connection for importing and exporting data
on USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 36.
▷ Music collection.
The socket is located below the glove com‐ ▷ Importing Trips.

partment.
Without Professional navigation
system or TV: at a glance
Rear center console
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐

Remove the cover. partment.
156
With Professional navigation system Hints

or TV: at a glance Danger of pinching
Before folding down the rear seat back‐
rests, ensure that the area of movement of the
backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no
one is located in or reaches into the area of
movement of the rear seat backrests when the
middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐
jury or damage may result.◀
Lock the rear seat backrests in position

The USB interface is located in the center arm‐ Before installation of child restraint sys‐
rest. tems on the rear seat backrest, set a backrest
tilt at which the childseat rests firmly against
the backrest and securely latch all backrests.
Notes Otherwise, the stability of the child seat is lim‐
Observe the following when connecting: ited, and there is an increased risk of injury be‐
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ cause of unexpected movement of the rear
nector into the USB interface. seat backrest.◀
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or Retract the head restraint if necessary
lamps to the USB interface. before backrest is folded down
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. With folding head restraints, fold in the head
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge restraints before folding down the backrests,
external devices. or damage may result.◀
Opening
Through-loading system 1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety
belt in the rear using the latch plate of an‐
The concept
other safety belt.
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt
down the rear seat backrest.
into the specially designated fixture on the
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts rear window shelf.
at a ratio of 60 to 40.
If equipped with through-loading system: the
rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–20–
40.
The sides can be folded down separately or to‐
gether.
3. Push the corresponding head restraint

down as far as it will go.
157
4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo Folding down the middle section
area to release the rear seat backrest. 1. Fold in the middle head restraint.
2. Reach into the recess and pull the middle
section forward.
5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves

forward slightly.
6. Fold backrest forward.
Closing
1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
Ensure that the lock is securely en‐
gaged
Make sure that the lock engages properly
when folding back, otherwise transported
cargo could enter the passenger compart‐
ment during braking or evasive maneuvers
and endanger the vehicle occupants.◀
2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on

the rear window shelf.
3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the
center safety belt. Make sure you hear the
latch plate engage.
To secure cargo, refer to page 170, with nets
or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with
lashing eyes.
158
Storage compartments Controls
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 160.
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
ment is also described that is not available in a console, refer to page 161.
for safety-related functions and systems. Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Notes
Note
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Do not stow any objects in the passenger
compartment without securing them; other‐ Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
wise, they may present a danger to occupants ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
for instance during braking and avoidance ma‐ cur during accidents.◀
neuvers.◀
Opening
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐
board
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.
The mat materials could damage the dash‐
board.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior: Pull the handle.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, The light in the glove compartment switches
refer to page 160. on.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger The net in the glove compartment is provided
side, refer to page 159. for stowing the storage tray for the cupholder,
refer to page 161.
▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage
compartment, in front of the cupholders,
refer to page 160. Closing
▷ Storage compartment in the front center Fold cover closed.
armrest, refer to page 160.
159
Controls Storage compartments
Locking Front storage compartment

The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key to separately secure the trunk
lid, refer to page 41, for example.
This prevents access to the glove compart‐
ment and to the cargo area.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side Raise the lid to open it.
Note
Close the glove compartment again im‐
Compartments in the doors
mediately
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ Do not stow any breakable objects
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ Do not store any breakable objects, e. g.
cur during accidents.◀ glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is
an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐
cident.◀
Opening
Center armrest
Front
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Fold the center armrest up.
Repositioning
Center armrest can be pushed forwards or
backwards. It engages in the end positions.
160
Connection for an external audio Storage tray for front cupholders

device The cupholder with the storage tray can be
. used for additional storage. To do this, place
the storage tray in the cupholder.
Only use the storage tray for small objects,
such as keys or the remote control.
When not in use, stow the storage tray in the
glove compartment net. Insert the storage tray
into the net so that the top surface faces up.
Storage compartment in the Note the trapezoidal shape of the net and tray.
rear
Rear
Storage compartment is located in the rear
center console. In the center armrest.
Cupholders
Hints
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
drinks
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is
the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀ Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
Unsuitable containers
To close: push both covers back in, one after
Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐ the other.
tainers into the cupholders. This may result in
damage.◀ Pushing back the covers
Push back the covers before folding up
Front the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder
could become damaged.◀
Clothes hooks
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐
er's vision.◀
161
Controls Storage compartments
No heavy objects Retaining strap

Do not hang heavy objects from the A retaining strap is available on the right side
hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger trim for fastening small objects.
to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers.◀ Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 170, there
are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area Floor net
The floor net can also be used to Secure the
Storage compartment load, refer to page 170, and to store small
A storage compartment is located on the left parts.
side.
Storage compartment under cargo
Located on the right side is a storage compart‐
floor panel
ment for the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to
page 206, and first aid kit, refer to page 218. Maximum load
To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
Net exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 lbs/
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the 20 kg in the storage compartment under the
left side. cargo floor panel.◀
Hooks/multi-function hook
Raise the cargo floor panel, arrow 1, and latch

at top, if necessary, arrow 2.
A multi-function hook is located on each side
of the cargo area. The multi-function hooks
can be loaded up to a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg.
Partitioning the compartment
The compartment can be divided using an at‐
Light and suitable objects only tachable partition.
Only hang light bags or suitable objects
from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger
of objects flying about during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it
has been appropriately secured.◀
162
163
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.

Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle equipment Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
equipment that is offered in the model series is Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake
discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during
this break-in period.
Clutch
Breaking-in period
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
General information
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to engage the clutch gently.
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a Following part replacement
long vehicle life and good economy. The same breaking in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
Engine and differential above have to be renewed in the course of the
Always obey the official speed limit. vehicle's operating life.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road General driving notes
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and Closing the trunk lid
100 mph/160 km/h. Drive with the trunk lid closed
▷ For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
93 mph/150 km/h. wise, in the event of an accident or braking and
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ evasive maneuvers, passengers and other road
stances. users may be injured, and the vehicle may be
damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km ter the passenger compartment.◀
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
increased. avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
Tires
▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full ▷ Drive moderately.
traction potential until after an initial breaking-
in period.
166
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Hot exhaust system generated during transmission will be dis‐

charged from the vehicle interior.◀
Hot exhaust system
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system.
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
form between the tires and road surface.
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐ loss of contact between the tires and the road
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐ steer and brake the vehicle.
ous personal injury as well as property dam‐ Hydroplaning
age.
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀
there is the danger of getting burned.◀
Driving through water

Diesel particulate filter
Drive through calm water only and only if it is
The diesel particulate filter collects soot parti‐ not deeper than. 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this
cles and burns them periodically at high tem‐ height, no faster than walking speed, up to
peratures. 6 mph/10 km/h.
During the cleaning time of several minutes,
Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
the following may occur:
tions
▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less
Do not exceed this water depth and walking
smoothly.
speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the
▷ Noises and a slight amount of smoke com‐ electrical systems and the transmission may
ing from the exhaust until shortly after the be damaged.◀
engine is shut down.
▷ A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐ Braking safely
sary to achieve the accustomed perform‐
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ance.
ard feature.
Mobile communication devices in the Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
vehicle way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
sary.
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
The vehicle maintains steering responsive‐
hicle
ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a
It is advised that you do not use mobile com‐ minimum of steering effort.
munication devices, e.g., mobile phones, in‐
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
side the vehicle without connecting them di‐
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
rectly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the
active mode.
vehicle electronics and mobile communication
devices can interfere with each other. In addi‐
tion, there is no assurance that the radiation
167
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Objects within the range of movement Do not drive in neutral

of the pedals Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
No objects in the area around the pedals stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.
In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
available with the engine stopped.◀
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving and create the risk of an Brake disc corrosion
accident. The corrosion on the brake discs and the con‐
Do not place additional floor mats over existing tamination on the brake pads are furthered by:
mats or other objects. ▷ Low mileage.
Only use floor mats that have been approved ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in used at all.
place. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
tened again after they were removed for clean‐ that must be exerted by the pads during brake
ing, for example.◀ applications to clean the discs is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
Driving in wet conditions brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
When roads are wet coated with road salt or fect that generally cannot be corrected.
there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pres‐
sure on the brake pedal every few miles. Condensation under the parked
Ensure that this action does not endanger vehicle
other road users. When using the automatic climate control,
The heat generated in this process helps dry condensation water develops that exits under‐
the brake discs and pads. neath the vehicle.
In this way braking efficiency will be available Traces of water under the vehicle like this are
when you need it. normal.
Hills
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required.
Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re‐
sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi‐
ciency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if necessary.
Avoid load on the brakes
Avoid placing excessive load on the
brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐
sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear
and possibly even brake failure.◀
168
Loading Driving tips
Loading
Vehicle equipment ▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
All standard, country-specific and optional or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
equipment that is offered in the model series is vehicle and unstable driving situations
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ may result.
Hints
Overloading the vehicle
To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐
ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐ 2. Determine the combined weight of the
hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and driver and passengers that will be riding in
increases the rate at which damage develops your vehicle.
inside the tires. This could result in a sudden 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ and passengers from XXX kilograms or
No fluids in the trunk YYY pounds.
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the 4. The resulting figure equals the available
trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
aged.◀ pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
Securing cargo 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
Always position and secure the cargo as passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
described above; otherwise, it can endanger available cargo and luggage load capacity
the car's occupants if sudden braking or is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
swerving becomes necessary. 400 lbs.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity
pants.◀ calculated in Step 4.
Determining the load limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
169
Driving tips Loading
Load Securing cargo

Lashing eyes in the cargo area
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the To secure the cargo there are four lashing
less cargo that can be transported. eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
Stowing cargo The floor net can also be used to Secure the
load and to store small parts.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo. Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of area floor.
the backrests.
Securing cargo
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or
draw straps to the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
170
Loading Driving tips
Securing cargo Therefore, note the following when loading

Always position and secure the cargo as and driving:
described above; otherwise, it can endanger ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
the car's occupants if sudden braking or loads and the approved gross vehicle
swerving becomes necessary. weight.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be ▷ The roof load should not be too large in
thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐ area.
den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
pants.◀
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie
with ratchet straps.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
Note path of the trunk lid.
Roof racks are available as special accessories. ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
Securing gently.
Follow the installation instructions of the roof

rack.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The anchorage points are located in the roof

drip rail above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Loading
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
171
Driving tips Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment Close the windows and glass
All standard, country-specific and optional sunroof
equipment that is offered in the model series is Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ open results in increased air resistance and
ment is also described that is not available in a thereby reduces the range.
Tires
General information
General information Tires can affect fuel consumption values in
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for various ways, for instance fuel consumption
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ can be influenced by the size of the tires.
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Check the tire inflation pressure
ferent factors. regularly
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐
ing style and regular maintenance can have an tion pressure at least twice a month and before
influence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐ starting on a long trip.
ronmental impact. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Drive away immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
Remove attached parts the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
following use
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage reach its operating temperature.
racks which are no longer required following
use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ Look well ahead when
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
fuel consumption.
172
Saving fuel Driving tips
Avoid high engine speeds In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐

mined by other factors, such as driving style,
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐ road conditions, maintenance or environmental
ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. factors.
When accelerating, shift up before reaching
high engine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into Switch off any functions that
the highest applicable gear and drive with the are not currently needed
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed. Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
and-go traffic.
The gear shift indicator of your vehicle indi‐
Therefore, switch off these functions if they
cates the most fuel efficient gear.
are not actually needed.
The ECO PRO driving program supports the
Use coasting energy conserving use of comfort functions.
These functions are automatically deactivated
When approaching a red light, take your foot partially or completely.
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the Have maintenance carried
accelerator and let the vehicle roll. out
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
The maintenance should be carried out by
Switch off the engine during your service center.
longer stops Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., to page 204.
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
ECO PRO
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle The concept
automatically switches off the engine during a ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
stop. on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
If the engine is switched off and then restarted gine control and comfort functions, e. g. the
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ climate control output, are adjusted.
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are In addition, context-sensitive instructions can
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ be displayed that assist in driving in a manner
onds of switching off the engine. that optimizes fuel consumption.
Using this system can cause certain compo‐ In the instrument display, the extension of the
nents of the vehicle to become worn prema‐ range achieved by this can be displayed as a
turely. bonus range.
173
At a glance The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐

The system includes the following cient.
EfficientDynamics functions and displays: By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 174. ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the passenger compartment, fuel
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to
consumption can be economized.
page 175
The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
mirror heating are also reduced.
page 174.
The exterior mirror heating is made available
Activate ECO PRO when outside temperatures are very cold.
Press button repeatedly until ECO ECO PRO potential

PRO is displayed in the instrument
The percentage of potential savings that can
cluster.
be achieved with the current configuration is
displayed.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1. Activate ECO PRO. ECO PRO bonus range
2. "Configure ECO PRO" An extension of the range can
3. Configure the program. be achieved by an adjusted driv‐
ing style.
Via the iDrive This may be displayed as the
1. "Settings" bonus range in the instrument
cluster.
2. "ECO PRO mode"
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
Or
The bonus range is automatically reset every
1. "Settings" time the vehicle is refueled.
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO" Driving style
Configure the program.
ECO PRO Tip

▷ "Tip at:":
Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO
Tip is to be displayed.
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO
speed is exceeded.
In the tachometer, a mark in the bar display in‐
dicates the current efficiency of the driving
ECO PRO climate control
style.
"ECO PRO climate control"
174
Mark in the CHARGE area, arrow 1: display for Symbol Measure

energy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Automatic transmission: switch
Mark in the POWER area, arrow 2: display
from M/S to D and avoid manual
when accelerating.
shift interventions.
The efficiency of the driving style is shown by
the color of the bar: Manual shift transmission: follow
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long shifting instructions.
as the mark moves within the blue range.
Manual shift transmission: engage
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by neutral for engine stop.
backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all
conditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving Indications on the Control Display
are met.
EfficientDynamics
ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed during driving.
The arrow indicates that the
driving style can be adjusted to 1. "Vehicle Info"
be more fuel efficient by backing 2. "EfficientDynamics"
off the accelerator for instance.
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
Note played within an adjustable time frame.
The driving style display and ECO PRO tips in
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
the instrument cluster appear when the ECO
lected time frame.
PRO display is activated.
Trip interruptions are represented below the
Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
bar on the time axis.
1. "Settings" "Consumption history"
2. "Info display"
3. "ECO PRO Info" Adjusting fuel consumption history
time frame
ECO PRO tip - Symbols Select the symbol.
An additional symbol and a text instruction are
displayed. Resetting fuel consumption history
1. Open "Options".
Symbol Measure
2. "Reset consumption history"
For efficient driving style, back off
the accelerator or delay accelerating Displaying EfficientDynamics info
to allow time to assess road condi‐ The current efficiency can be displayed.
tions.
"EfficientDynamics info"
Reduce speed to the selected ECO The following systems are displayed:
PRO speed.
▷ Automatic engine start-stop function.
175
▷ Energy recovery. ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on

▷ Climate control output. steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Coasting. ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low

or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
Display ECO PRO tips sive current.
"ECO PRO Tips" ▷ Cruise control activated.

The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use.
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
Coasting a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if
The concept the following conditions are satisfied:
The system helps to conserve fuel. ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ ▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐
sion when transmission position D is engaged. tion D.
The vehicle continues traveling with the engine ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Transmis‐ temperature.
sion position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ Display
ing.
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is
depressed, the engine is automatically coupled The mark in the bar display be‐
to the transmission again. low the tachometer is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero
Hints point. The tachometer approxi‐
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐ mately indicates idle speed.
fer to page 173, driving mode. The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO the zero point during coasting.
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control. Indications on the Control Display
The function is available in a certain speed The Coasting driving condition is displayed in
range. EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode
A forward-looking driving style helps the driver is active.
to use the function as often as possible and The distance traveled in the Coasting driving
supports the fuel-conserving effect of coast‐ condition is indicated by a counter.
ing.
Safety mode
The function is not available if one of the fol‐
lowing conditions is satisfied.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
176
The function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style

analysis
Via the Driving Dynamics Control

1. Activate ECO PRO.
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:
2. "EfficientDynamics"
driving condition Coasting.
Displaying EfficientDynamics info

Display
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "EfficientDynamics" Display on the Control Display
3. "EfficientDynamics info"
Deactivating the system manually

The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
ure ECO PRO, refer to page 174, menu, e.g., to
use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐
eling downhill.
The setting is stored for the profile currently in
use.
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐
ECO PRO driving style analysis ysis consists of a symbolized road route and a
lookup table.
The concept The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
The system helps in this situation to develop ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
an especially efficient driving style and to con‐ the smoother the depicted road route be‐
serve fuel. comes, arrow 1.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The table of values contains stars. The more
The assessment is done in various categories efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
and is displayed on the Control Display. cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
Using this indication, the individual driving
style can be oriented toward conserving fuel. If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of
The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated.
stars is displayed.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
an efficient driving style.
PRO tips are displayed during the drive.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
Tips about the energy saving driving style,
range in the instrument cluster and on the
Conserving fuel, refer to page 172.
Control Display.
177
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle equipment 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

Hints 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached

Refuel promptly to the fuel filler flap.
Refuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is
not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Diesel engines
The filler neck is designed for refueling at die‐
sel fuel pumps.
Fuel cap Closing

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
Opening
clearly hear a click.
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be
closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐
ample.
180
Refueling Mobility
1. Open the cover on the right side trim. To

do this, turn the cap.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump

symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when

refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise
fuel may escape, causing harm to the environ‐
ment and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Obey safety regulations posted at the
gas station.◀
181
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle equipment xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
equipment that is offered in the model series is Do not refuel with Ethanol above the
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ maximum Ethanol proportion
ment is also described that is not available in a Do not refuel with Ethanol above the maximum
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional Ethanol proportion, that is, refueling with fuel
equipment or country variant. This also applies that contains more than 10 % Ethanol, flex fuel
for safety-related functions and systems. or other alcohols; otherwise, damage to the
engine and fuel supply could result.◀
Fuel recommendation Gasoline quality

BMW recommends AKI 91.
Note
General fuel quality Minimum fuel grade
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐ BMW recommends AKI 89.
tions can be of low quality. Switch gas stations Minimum fuel grade
or use fuel from brand name producers having
a higher octane level; otherwise, engine prob‐ Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
lems, such as poor engine starting perform‐ mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐
ance, poorer handling characteristics or driving formance.◀
performance may occur.◀ If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
Gasoline when starting at high outside temperatures.
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should This has no effect on the engine life.
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuel quality
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result
taining metal must not be used. in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐ tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
out metallic additives. ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ temperature and high altitude, may occur.
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or
iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
converter and other components.◀ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐
standards: ers.
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
182
Fuel Mobility
Failure to comply with these recommendations

may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Diesel
Low-Sulfur Diesel
The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel
with low sulfur content:
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx.
BMW Advanced Diesel
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case. The concept
Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel. BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox‐
The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must ides in the diesel emissions by injecting diesel
not exceed 5 %, referred to as B5. Do not use exhaust fluid reducing agent into the exhaust
gasoline. If you do fill the tank with the wrong system. A chemical reaction takes place inside
fuel, e.g., gasoline, do not start the engine as the catalytic converter that minimizes nitrogen
this may damage the engine.◀ oxides.
The vehicle has a tank that can be refilled.
After adding the wrong fuel, contact your serv‐
ice center or roadside assistance. To be able to start the engine as usual, there
must be an adequate reducing agent.
If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler
pipe of your BMW, please check to ensure that Reducing agent is added by the service center.
you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is
equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle. Warming up the system
In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel In order to warm the engine up to its operating
cannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck, temperature after a cold start, the automatic
please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for transmission may subsequently shift up to the
instructions on how to add fuel. For more infor‐ next higher gear.
mation on BMW Roadside Assistance, refer to
page 218. Displays in the instrument cluster
Winter diesel Reserve display

To ensure that the diesel engine remains op‐ This display in the instrument cluster provides
erational in the winter, use winter diesel. information about the distance that can still be
driven with the current reserve level.
It is available at gas stations during winter
months. The reserve indication is dis‐
The fuel filter heating system, included as a played starting at approx.
standard feature, prevents disruption of the 1,000 miles/1,600 km remaining
fuel supply while driving. range.
Do not add any diesel additives

Do not add additives, including gasoline;
otherwise, engine damage may occur.◀
183
Mobility Fuel
Refill in good time The reducing agent must be replenished as

The reducing agent must be replenished soon as the reserve display appears in the in‐
as soon as the Reserve display appears, other‐ strument cluster to avoid not being able to re‐
wise the engine cannot be restarted.◀ start the engine.
Diesel exhaust fluid at low

Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum
temperatures
The engine will continue to run Due to its physical properties, it is possible
even when the display shows --, that reducing agent may also need to be re‐
as long as it is not switched off plenished between regular maintenance ap‐
and all other operating condi‐ pointments if it is exposed to temperatures be‐
tions are satisfied, sufficient fuel low + 23 ℉/- 5 ℃. In this case, add reducing
for example. agent only immediately before starting to drive.
Engine does not start The need to replenish it is indicated by the Re‐
serve display in the instrument cluster.
Do not continue driving to the limit of the
remaining travel distance. Otherwise, you will At temperatures below + 12 ℉/- 11 ℃ the fill
not be able to restart the engine after switch‐ level in some cases cannot be measured.
ing it off.◀ After adding reducing agent, the reserve dis‐
play is displayed only until the fill level can be
measured again.
Filling with incorrect fuel
Replenishing Diesel exhaust fluid
the tank is filled with the incorrect fuel.
yourself in exceptional cases
After adding the wrong fuel, contact your serv‐ You can replenish reducing agent yourself in
ice center. exceptional cases, e.g., to get to the service
center.
System defect
Avoid contact with Diesel exhaust fluid
there is a system defect. Do not come into contact with the reduc‐
ing agent. Otherwise, skin or eye irritations
Have the diesel exhaust fluid may result.◀
replenished
Handling Diesel exhaust fluid
The reducing agent is added by the service
When working with reducing agent in
center within the context of regular mainte‐
closed spaces, ensure good ventilation. When
nance. Provided you observe this maintenance
the bottle or container is opened, acrid smell‐
schedule, it is normally necessary to replenish
ing fumes may escape.◀
the fluid once between maintenance appoint‐
ments. Keeping Diesel exhaust fluid out of reach
It may be necessary to have the fluid replen‐ of children
ished several times under particular circum‐ Keep reducing agent out of reach of children◀
stances, for example, if the vehicle is driven in
a particularly sporty style or if it is driven at Avoid contact with surfaces
high altitudes. Avoid contact of reducing agent with sur‐
faces of the vehicle. Damage could result.◀
184
Fuel Mobility
Suitable Diesel exhaust fluid 4. Press the bottle down, see arrow.
▷ Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. With The vehicle container will be filled.
this bottle and its special adapter, Diesel The container is full when the fill level in
exhaust fluid can be replenished simply the bottle no longer changes. It is not pos‐
and safely. sible to overfill.
▷ Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32
Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at your
Service Center.
Refill quantity
When the Reserve display starts, add at least 2
bottles of reducing agent.
This corresponds to approx. 1 gallon.
Tank for reducing agent 5. Pull back the bottle, see arrow, and un‐
screw it.
The tank for the reducing agent is located next

to the fuel tank. 6. Replace the fuel cap and turn it clockwise.
7. Close the fuel filler flap.
Adding engine oil
1. Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 180. After adding Diesel exhaust fluid
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise and re‐ Note
move.
Incorrect fluids
3. Place the bottle on it and turn it as far as it
will go, see arrow. After filling with incorrect fluids, such as
antifreeze for washer water, do not start the
engine, otherwise there is risk of fire.◀
Contact your service center.
Disposing of bottles
You take your empty Diesel exhaust
fluid bottles to your Service Center for
disposal.
185
Mobility Fuel
Do not dispose of empty bottles with house‐

hold waste unless this is permitted by local
regulations.
Reserve display
The Reserve display will still ap‐
pear along with the remaining
range after refilling.
Engine can be started.
After several minutes of driving,
the Reserve indication goes out.
Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum

After filling, the indication -- is
still displayed.
Only after the display goes out
can the engine -- be started.

Display -- goes out after approx. 1 minute.
2. Engine can be started.
186
Wheels and tires Mobility
Wheels and tires

Vehicle equipment than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure:
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
ment is also described that is not available in a ▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
equipment or country variant. This also applies Pressure specifications
for safety-related functions and systems. The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 188, contains all pressure specifications
for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐
Tire inflation pressure perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐
proved tire sizes and recommended tire
Safety information brands. This information can be obtained from
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ your service center.
sure influence the following: To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
▷ The service life of the tires. please note the following:
▷ Road safety. ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Driving comfort. ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Checking the pressure Tire inflation pressures up to

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of pres‐ 100 mph/160 km/h
sure. For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ to page 188, and adjust as necessary.
sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a
month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐
serve this precaution, you may be driving on
tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition
that may not only compromise your vehicle's
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage
and the risk of an accident.◀
Tires heat up during driving, and the tire infla‐

tion pressure increases along with the temper‐
ature of the tire. The tire inflation pressure
These pressure values can also be found on
specifications relate to cold tires or tires with
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
the ambient temperature.
door pillar.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
187
Mobility Wheels and tires
Maximum permissible speed Tire size Pressure specifications

Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐ in bar/PSI
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.5 / 36 -
90 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
Tire inflation pressure values up to
Rear: 255/30 R 20
100 mph/160 km/h
92 Y XL RSC
320i, 320i xDrive Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of
T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications
M 4.2 / 60
in bar/PSI
Specifications in 328i, 328d

bar/PSI with cold
tires Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
225/50 R 17 94 V 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32 Specifications in

M+S A/S RSC bar/PSI with cold
225/50 R 17 94 H tires
M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 225/50 R 17 94 V 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

M+S A/S RSC M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y 225/50 R 17 94 H
RSC M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V 225/45 R 18 91 V 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
M+S XL RSC M+S A/S RSC
Front: 225/50 R 17 2.2 / 32 - 225/45 R 18 91 Y
94 W RSC - 2.4 / 35 RSC
Rear: 255/45 R 17 225/45 R 18 95 V
98 W RSC M+S XL RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 - Front: 225/50 R 17 2.2 / 32 -

91 Y RSC - 2.2 / 32 94 W RSC - 2.2 / 35
Rear: 255/40 R 18 Rear: 255/45 R 17
95 Y RSC 98 W RSC
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 - Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 -

89 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35 91 Y RSC - 2.2 / 32
Rear: 255/35 R 19 Rear: 255/40 R 18
92 Y RSC 95 Y RSC
188
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 - Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 -

89 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35 91 Y RSC - 2.2 / 32
Rear: 255/35 R 19 Rear: 255/40 R 18
92 Y RSC 95 Y RSC
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.5 / 36 - Front: 225/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 -

90 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44 89 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35
Rear: 255/30 R 20 Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y XL RSC 92 Y RSC
Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of Front: 225/35 R 20 2.5 / 36 -

T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h 90 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
M 4.2 / 60 Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
328i xDrive, 328d xDrive Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of
T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications
M 4.2 / 60
in bar/PSI
Specifications in 335i, 335i xDrive

bar/PSI with cold
tires Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
225/50 R 17 94 V 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32 Specifications in

M+S A/S RSC bar/PSI with cold
225/50 R 17 94 H tires
M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 225/45 R 18 91 V 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38

M+S A/S RSC M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y 225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V 225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S XL RSC M+S RSC
Front: 225/50 R 17 2.2 / 32 - 225/45 R 18 95 V

94 W RSC M+S XL RSC
- 2.4 / 35
Rear: 255/45 R 17 Front: 225/45 R 18 2.2 / 32 -
98 W RSC 91 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC
189
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - 225/45 R 18 91 V 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

89 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 M+S A/S RSC
Rear: 255/35 R 19 225/45 R 18 91 Y
92 Y RSC RSC
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - 225/45 R 18 95 V

90 Y XL RSC M+S XL RSC
- 3.0 / 44
Rear: 255/30 R 20 Front: 225/50 R 17 2.2 / 32 -
92 Y XL RSC 94 W RSC - 2.4 / 35
Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of Rear: 255/45 R 17
50 mph / 80 km/h 98 W RSC
T 135/80 R 17 102
M 4.2 / 60 Front: 225/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 -
91 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35
Tire inflation pressures at max. Rear: 255/40 R 18
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 95 Y RSC
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h Front: 225/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 -

In order to drive at maximum speeds in 89 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, Rear: 255/35 R 19
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for 92 Y RSC
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.5 / 36 -
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
90 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of
T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
320i, 320i xDrive M 4.2 / 60
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications With high-speed tuning feature
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/50 R 17 94 V 2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39

M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC
190
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifica‐

in bar/PSI tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold
tires tires
225/50 R 17 94 V 2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39 225/50 R 17 94 V M 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

M+S A/S RSC +S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H 225/50 R 17 94 H M
M+S RSC +S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42 225/45 R 18 91 V M 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45

RSC +S A/S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V 225/45 R 18 91 Y
M+S XL RSC RSC
Front: 225/50 R 17 2.2 / 32 - 225/45 R 18 95 V M

94 W RSC +S XL RSC
- 2.4 / 35
Rear: 255/45 R 17 Front: 225/50 R 17 2.4 / 35 -
98 W RSC 94 W RSC - 2.6 / 38
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 - Rear:
91 Y RSC 255/45 R 17 98 W
- 2.4 / 35
RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 18
95 Y RSC Front: 225/45 R 18 2.6 / 38 -
91 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 -
89 Y RSC Rear:
- 2.6 / 38
255/40 R 18 95 Y
Rear: 255/35 R 19
RSC
92 Y RSC
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 -
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.5 / 36 -
89 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41
90 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
Rear:
Rear: 255/30 R 20
255/35 R 19 92 Y
92 Y XL RSC
RSC
Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.7 / 39 -
T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h 90 Y XL RSC - 3.2 / 46
M 4.2 / 60
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC
328i, 328i xDrive, 328d, 328d xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 135/80 R 17 102
M 4.2 / 60
191
With high-speed tuning feature Tire size Pressure specifications

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
in bar/PSI Specifications in
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold
bar/PSI with cold tires
tires
225/45 R 18 91 V 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

225/50 R 17 94 H M 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42 M+S A/S RSC
+S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 Y
RSC
225/45 R 18 91 Y 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
RSC 225/50 R 17 94 H
M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 95 V M
+S XL RSC 225/45 R 18 95 V
M+S XL RSC
Front: 225/50 R 17 2.4 / 35 -
94 W RSC Front: 225/45 R 18 2.7 / 39 -
- 2.6 / 38
91 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41
Rear:
255/45 R 17 98 W Rear: 255/40 R 18
RSC 95 Y RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.6 / 38 - Front: 225/40 R 19 2.7 / 39 -

91 Y RSC 89 Y RSC - 3.0 / 44
- 2.6 / 38
Rear: Rear: 255/35 R 19
255/40 R 18 95 Y 92 Y RSC
RSC Front: 225/35 R 20 2.9 /42 -
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 - 90 Y XL RSC - 3.4 / 49
89 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 255/30 R 20
Rear: 92 Y XL RSC
255/35 R 19 92 Y Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of
RSC 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 135/80 R 17 102
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.7 / 39 - M 4.2 / 60
90 Y XL RSC - 3.2 / 46
Rear: 255/30 R 20 With high-speed tuning feature
92 Y XL RSC

T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
335i, 335i xDrive

Without high-speed tuning feature
192
Tire size Pressure specifications Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

in bar/PSI
Speed letter
Specifications in
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
bar/PSI with cold
tires R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
225/45 R 18 91 Y 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
RSC H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
225/50 R 17 94 H V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h

M+S RSC W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
225/45 R 18 95 V Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
M+S XL RSC
Tire Identification Number
Front: 225/45 R 18 2.7 / 39 -
91 Y RSC DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1013
- 2.8 / 41
Rear: 255/40 R 18 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
95 Y RSC xxx: tire size and tire design
1013: tire age
Front: 225/40 R 19 2.7 / 39 -
89 Y RSC Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
- 3.0 / 44
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Rear: 255/35 R 19
92 Y RSC
Tire age
Front: 225/35 R 20 2.9 /42 - DOT … 1013: the tire was manufactured in the
90 Y XL RSC - 3.4 / 49 10th week 2013.
Rear: 255/30 R 20
92 Y XL RSC Recommendation
Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every
6 years.
T 135/80 R 17 102 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
Tire identification marks and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Tire size Temperature A
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm DOT Quality Grades
45: aspect ratio in % Treadwear
R: radial tire code Traction AA A B C
18: rim diameter in inches Temperature A B C
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
193
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these quired by law.
grades.
Temperature grade for this tire
Treadwear The temperature grade for this tire is es‐

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
ernment test course. For example, a tire
possible tire failure.
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,
times as well on the government course as a If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of RSC – Run-flat tires
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 197, are labeled
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ with a circular symbol containing the letters
ing habits, service practices and differences in RSC marked on the sidewall.
road characteristics and climate.
M+S
Traction
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, weather performance than summer tires.
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under Tire tread
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire Summer tires
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
The traction grade assigned to this tire is 0.12 in/3 mm.
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Winter tires
Temperature
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
0.16 in/4 mm.
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
heat when tested under controlled conditions less suitable for winter operation.
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
194
Minimum tread depth In case of tire damage

If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; other‐
wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the nearest service center.
Have the vehicle towed or transported there.
Otherwise, tire damage can become life threat‐
ening for vehicle occupants and also other
road users.◀
Wear indicators are distributed around the
Repair of tire damage
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
They are marked on the side of the tire with damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Tire damage
Changing wheels and tires
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign Mounting
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Information on mounting tires
Notes Have mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles If this work is not carried out properly, there is
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and the danger of subsequent damage and related
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur safety hazards.◀
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be Wheel and tire combination
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your You can ask the service center about the right
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions
with low-profile tires. for the vehicle.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐ Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
fects: the function of a variety of systems such as
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving. ABS or DSC.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
dency to pull to the left or right. sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over figuration from a single manufacturer.
curbs, road damage, or similar things. Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
195
Approved wheels and tires Retreaded tires

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐ Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
mends that you use only wheels and tires that sign and age of the tire casing structures can
have been approved for your particular vehicle limit service life and have a negative impact on
model. road safety.◀
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body con‐ Winter tires
tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. Winter tires are recommended for operating on
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ winter roads.
uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ Although so-called all-season M+S tires do
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore provide better winter traction than summer
cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐ tires, they do not provide the same level of per‐
cle if they are mounted.◀ formance as winter tires.
Recommended tire brands Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field
of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire
specialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for
the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐
age and accidents can occur.◀
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
Run-flat tires
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
With proper use, these tires meet the highest
own safety you should replace them only with
standards for safety and handling.
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Your service center will be
New tires glad to advise you.
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full Rotating wheels between axles
traction potential until after an initial breaking- The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
in period. against switching wheels between the front
Drive conservatively for the first and rear axles.
200 miles/300 km. This can impair the handling characteristics.
Retreaded tires Storage

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
ommend the use of retreaded tires. as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
196
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ Use

sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 205/60 R 16.
Run-flat tires
▷ 225/55 R 16.
Label ▷ 225/50 R 17.
▷ 225/45 R 18.
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
The wheels are composed of special rims and in incorrect readings.
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
gree.
Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the Maximum speed with snow chains
event of a pressure loss.
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to when using snow chains.
page 104.
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
page 101.
Changing run-flat tires

For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains
have been tested by the manufacturer of the
vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved.
Information about the approved snow chains
are available from the service center.
197
Mobility Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative terminal 6 Oil filler neck

2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant reservoir
3 Washer fluid reservoir The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal diesel engines is located on the opposite
side of the engine compartment.
5 Engine compartment fuse box
198
Engine compartment Mobility
Hood Indicator/warning lamps

When the hood is opened, a Check Control
Hints message is displayed.
Working in the engine compartment
Closing the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is
the danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards.◀
Never reach into the engine compart‐ Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16
ment in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
Never reach into the intermediate spaces or The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise,
there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hot Hood open when driving
parts.◀ If you see any signs that the hood is not
completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
Fold down wiper arm mediately and close it securely.◀
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield, or this Danger of pinching
may result in damage.◀ Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Opening the hood
1. Pull lever in the interior:
Engine is released, arrow 1.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever

again:
Hood can be opened, arrow 2.
199
Mobility Engine oil
Engine oil
Vehicle equipment trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
is displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
perform a detailed measurement.
Displaying the oil level
equipment or country variant. This also applies 1. "Vehicle Info"
for safety-related functions and systems. 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
General information Oil level display messages

The engine oil consumption is dependent on Different messages appear on the display de‐
the driving style and driving conditions. When pending on the oil level. Pay attention to these
a sporty driving style is used, the engine oil messages.
consumption, for example, is clearly higher. If the engine oil level is too low, within the next
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level 125 miles/200 km Add oil, refer to page 201.
after refueling. Engine oil level too low
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil Add oil immediately; otherwise, an insuf‐
measurement. ficient amount of engine oil could result in en‐
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ gine damage.◀
uring principles.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
▷ Status display
Too much engine oil
▷ Detailed measurement
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
Checking the oil level age.◀
electronically
Detailed measurement
Status display
The concept
The concept In the detailed measurement the oil level is
The oil level is monitored electronically during checked and displayed via a scale.
driving and shown on the Control Display. During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a creased somewhat.
check control message is displayed.
General information
Requirements A detailed measurement is only possible with
A current measured value is available after ap‐ certain engines.
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
200
Engine oil Mobility
Requirements Filler neck

▷ Vehicle is on level road.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
depressed.
▷ Automatic transmission: selector lever in
transmission position N or P and accelera‐
tor pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Only replenish the maximum oil amount of
Performing a detailed measurement 1 US quart/liter if the signal is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level: Adding oil
1. "Vehicle Info" Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.
2. "Vehicle status" Otherwise, the engine may be damaged.◀
3. "Measure engine oil level" Do not add too much engine oil
4. "Start measurement" When too much engine oil is added, im‐
The oil level is checked and displayed via a mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise,
scale. this may cause engine damage.◀
Duration: approx. 1 minute.
Protect children
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
Adding engine oil
to prevent health risks.◀
General information
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
cle before engine oil is added. Oil types for refilling
Hints
No oil additives
Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Viscosity grades for engine oils

When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine
damage may occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of

the engine.
201
Mobility Engine oil
Some types of oils in some cases are not avail‐

able in all countries.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
Diesel engine
BMW Longlife-04.
Additional information about the approved

types of oils can be requested from the service
center.
Alternative oil types

If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
specification can be added:
Gasoline engine
API SM or superior grade specification.
Diesel engine
API ILSAC GF-5.
Engine oil change

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
having the engine oil changed by your service
center.
202
Coolant Mobility
Coolant
Vehicle equipment Symbol Meaning
All standard, country-specific and optional Maximum
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Minimum
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional Filling
equipment or country variant. This also applies 1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex‐
cess pressure to dissipate, and then open
Hints it.
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while
the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant
may cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives. 3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
Not all commercially available additives are to the specified level; do not overfill.
suitable for the vehicle. Information about the 4. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
suitable additives are available from the service The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
center. the cap must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Coolant level
Checking Disposal
1. Let the engine cool.
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐ tal protection regulations when dispos‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks. ing of coolant and coolant additives.
The marks are on the side of the coolant
reservoir.
203
Mobility Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
ment is also described that is not available in a If this occurs, have a service center update the
vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional time-dependent maintenance procedures,
equipment or country variant. This also applies such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
for safety-related functions and systems. changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.
BMW maintenance system

Service and Warranty
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
Information Booklet for US
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ models and Warranty and
erational reliability of the vehicle. Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
Condition Based Service formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
CBS and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ els for additional information on service re‐
count the driving conditions of your vehicle. quirements.
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐ Maintenance and repair should be performed
mines the maintenance requirements. by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐
The system makes it possible to adapt the ular maintenance procedures recorded in the
amount of maintenance you need to your user vehicle's Service and Warranty Information
profile. Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
Detailed information on service requirements,
els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐
refer to page 82, can be displayed on the Con‐
nance.
trol Display.
Service data in the remote control

Socket for OBD Onboard
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. Diagnosis
Your service center will read out this data and
suggest the right array of service procedures Note
for your vehicle. Socket for Onboard Diagnosis
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐ The socket for onboard diagnostics may
mote control with which the vehicle was driven only be used by the service center or a work‐
most recently. shop that operates in accordance with the
specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with
204
Maintenance Mobility
correspondingly trained personnel and other

authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result
in operating problems for the vehicle.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for

checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Canadian model: warning light indi‐
cates the engine symbol.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
205
Mobility Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment 3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
Onboard vehicle tool kit

4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Folding down wipers before opening the
hood
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms with the wiper blades are against
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the the windshield to prevent damage.◀
right side in the cargo area in a storage com‐
partment. Open the cover.
Lamp and bulb replacement

Wiper blade replacement Hints
Note Lamps and bulbs

Do not fold down the wipers without Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
wiper blades tion to vehicle safety.
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
have not been installed; this may damage the that you entrust corresponding procedures to
windshield.◀ the service center if you are unfamiliar with
them or they are not described here.
Replacing the wiper blades You can obtain a selection of replacement
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer bulbs at the service center.
to page 70, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
206
Replacing components Mobility
Danger of burns Headlamp glass

Only change bulbs when they are cool; Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
otherwise, there is the danger of getting ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When
burned.◀ driving with the light switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
Working on the lighting system lamp glasses do not need to be changed.
When working on the lighting system, If the headlamps do not dim despite driving
you should always switch off the lights af‐ with the light switched on, increasing humidity
fected to prevent short circuits. forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage service center check this.
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ Headlamp setting
The headlamp adjustments can be affected by
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
changing lamps and bulbs. Therefore after a
on xenon headlamps
change, have the headlamp setting checked
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, and corrected by Service.
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage Front lamps, bulb replacement
present in the system, there is the danger of
fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ Halogen headlamps
Do not touch the bulbs
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

1 Parking lamps
Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover
2 High beams/headlamp flasher
serve as the light source for controls, display
elements and other equipment. 3 Low beams
These light-emitting diodes, which are related 4 Turn signal
to conventional lasers, are officially designated 5 Daytime running lights
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
207
Accessing the turn signals and low beams Low beams

Follow the general instructions on Lamps and 55-watt bulb, H7.
bulbs, refer to page 206.
1. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ move.
ets and remove the cover.
2. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it

from the holder and remove.
Turn signal
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the

wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
holder counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the connector off the bulb.

4. Attach the connector to the new bulb.
5. First insert the bulb at the top with the
strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,
arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into
2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn place.
counterclockwise and remove.
3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
4. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap.

Make sure that the cap engages.
208
Accessing the daytime running lights, high High beams/headlamp flasher

beams/headlamp flasher and parking 55-watt bulb, H7.
lamps
1. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
from the holder and remove.
1. Open the hood, refer to page 199.

2. Turn the cap counterclockwise and re‐
move.
2. Pull the connector off the bulb.

3. Attach the connector to the new bulb.
4. First insert the bulb at the top with the
strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,
arrow 2. Make sure that the bulb snaps into
Parking lamps
place.
6-watt bulb, H6W.
1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and

remove.

2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn

3. To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceed
in reverse order of removal. Make sure that
the bulb holder snaps into place.
209
Daytime running lights Headlamps

24-watt bulb, PW24W.
1. If necessary, remove the high beam bulb

connector.
2. Remove the bulb holder.
1 Parking lamps / daytime running lights

2 Low beams/high beams/headlamp flasher
3 Turn signal
Low beams and high beams are designed with

3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder. xenon technology.
4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse The parking lamps and daylight running lights
order of removal. During insertion, the bot‐ are made using LED technology.
tom of the bulb holder must be facing
Contact your service center in the event of a
downward. Make sure that the bulb holder
malfunction.
snaps into place.
5. Attach the high beam bulb connector. Turn signal
6. Close the headlamp housing with the cap. Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
Make sure that the cap engages. bulbs, refer to page 206.
Xenon headlamps
Xenon headlamps
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lamps on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and
continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage
present in the system, there is the danger of
fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,

please contact your BMW center.
210
21-watt bulb, PY21W Carefully raise the wheel house panel, ar‐
row 2.
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐
ets and remove the cover.
2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1.
2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the Turn the bulb, arrow 2.
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise.
holder counterclockwise and remove. Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐
wise.
Remove the bulb.
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn

4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐ 3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector
verse order of removal. and screw on the wheel house panel.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Front fog lamps Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 206.
bulbs, refer to page 206. The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
35-watt bulb, H8. LED technology. Contact your service center
in the event of a malfunction.
1. Use the back side of the screwdriver from
the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the
three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1.
211
Tail lamps, bulb replacement Removing the exterior tail lamp

1. Open trunk lid.
At a glance
2. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit to loosen the screw, arrow 1,
and remove the cover, arrow 2.
1 Turn signal
2 Reversing lamp
3 Inside brake lamp 3. Use the screwdriver handle to loosen the
4 Tail lamps two nuts, arrows 1 and 2, and remove. The
tail lamp is still attached to a rubber mount
5 Outside brake lamp
on the outside.
Bulb replacement, exterior tail lamps
General information
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL.
Outer brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21W.
The tail lamps feature LED technology. Con‐
tact your service center in the event of a mal‐ 4. Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp and
function. carefully swing it back and out of the rub‐
ber mount, arrow 1. Use your free hand to
Use caution when replacing the bulb hold it in place in order to prevent the tail
Use caution and proceed one step at a lamp from coming loose suddenly. Make
time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam‐ sure that the foam rubber sealing ring is on
age to the tail lamps or vehicle.◀ the centering pin, arrow 2.
212
5. Remove the connecting line from the clip component, arrow 2. Make sure that the
on the bulb holder. tail lamp engages in the rubber mount.
6. Release the catch at the top on the con‐
nector of the connecting line and remove
the connector from the bulb holder.
Replacing the bulbs

1. Loosen the four fasteners, arrow 1, on the
bulb holder and remove the bulb holder
from the tail lamp, arrow 2.
4. Screw the tail lamp on with the two nuts.

5. Fit the cover in place and screw onto the
fastener. Make sure that the tubular seal is
not pinched.
Lamps in the trunk lid
General information
2. Press the defective bulb gently into the Follow the general instructions on Lamps and
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove. bulbs, refer to page 206.
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the Reversing lamps: 16-watt bulb, PW16W.
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make Inner brake lamps: 21-watt bulb, H21W
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners. Accessing the lamps
1. Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
Installing the tail lamp
hicle tool kit to loosen and completely re‐
1. Connect the connecting line to the tail move the six screws on the trim.
lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip.
2. Make sure that the foam rubber sealing
ring is on the centering pin, arrow 2, and is
not damaged.
3. Position and firmly press the outer part of
the tail lamp onto the rubber mount, ar‐
row 1 and the inner part onto the centering
2. Carefully loosen the trim from the trunk lid,

starting at the edge and working toward
the area around the recessed grips. Make
sure that the trim does not become stuck.
3. Carefully swing out the trim.
213
Replacing the reversing lamp and inner These lamps are made using LED technology.
brake lamp Contact your service center in the event of a
1. Loosen the two holders, arrow 1 and pull malfunction.
down on the lamp holder to remove, ar‐
row 2.
Changing wheels
Hints
The vehicle equipment does not include a
spare tire.
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
2. Unscrew the defective bulb from the accessories from your service center.
socket counterclockwise for reversing or
rear fog lamps. Jacking points for the vehicle jack
3. Insert the new bulb.
Installing the bulb holder

1. Slide the bulb holder onto the two guide
pins, arrow 1. Insert the two contacts, ar‐
row 2, into the connections, arrow 3.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐

cated at the positions shown.
Vehicle battery
2. Press on the bulb holder. Make sure that Maintenance
the two exterior holders latch into place. The battery is maintenance-free. The added
3. Swing the trim back onto the trunk lid and amount of acid is sufficient for the service life
secure. of the battery.
Your service center will be glad to advise you
Tail lamp, license plate lamp and on questions regarding the battery.
central brake lamp
214
Battery replacement ▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐

tions again.
Use approved vehicle batteries only
▷ Time: update.
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; ▷ Date: update.
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and ▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐ of the navigation.
ble.◀
After a battery replacement, have the battery

Disposing of old batteries
registered on the vehicle by your service cen‐ Have old batteries disposed of by your
ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully service center or bring them to a recy‐
available and that any Check Control mes‐ cling center.
sages of these comfort functions are no longer Maintain the battery in an upright position for
displayed. transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not plug chargers into the socket
Fuses
Do not connect battery chargers to the Hints
factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this
Replacing fuses
may damage the battery.◀
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
General information
tute of another color or amperage rating; this
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
remains usable for its full service life.
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
lowing cases:
in the cargo area.
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives. In the engine compartment
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐ 1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
riods, longer than a month. the three cover screws, arrow 1.
Starting aid terminals

In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 219, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed: 2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2.
215
3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.

4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.
Information on the fuse types and locations is

found on a separate sheet.
Attaching the covers

1. When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the

three screws.
In the cargo area
Raise the cargo floor panel.
216
Breakdown assistance Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment Hints
All standard, country-specific and optional Emergency Request not guaranteed

equipment that is offered in the model series is For technical reasons, the Emergency
described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐
ment is also described that is not available in a able conditions.◀
equipment or country variant. This also applies Initiating an Emergency Request
Hazard warning flashers
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
The button is located in the center console. ▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
Intelligent Emergency lished.
Request ▷ The LED flashes when a connection to the
BMW Response Center has been estab‐
Requirements lished.
▷ The radio ready state is switched on. When the emergency request is received
▷ The Assist system is functional. at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has Response Center contacts you and takes
been activated. further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
General information BMW Response Center can take further
Only press the SOS button in an emergency. steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle
217
Mobility Breakdown assistance
if it can be established, are transmitted to Storage

the BMW Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing, but the BMW Re‐
sponse Center can no longer be heard via
the speaker, you can nevertheless still be
heard for the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request

automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ The first aid kit is located in the cargo area in a
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐ storage compartment.
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Roadside Assistance
Warning triangle
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can
be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to
Roadside Assistance can be established di‐
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
rectly.
the trunk lid.
For additional information, see user's manual
To remove, loosen the bracket.
for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
First aid kit

Jump-starting
Note
Some of the articles have a limited service life. Notes
Check the expiration dates of the contents If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
regularly and replace any expired items started using the battery of another vehicle
promptly. and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
218
Do not touch live parts

To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐
jury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running.◀
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ battery negative terminal.
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
Connecting the cables
consumers in both vehicles.
1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid
Bodywork contact between vehicles terminal.
Make sure that there is no contact be‐ 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀ battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
Starting aid terminals tance.
Connecting order 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
battery, or to the corresponding starting
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
from sparking.◀
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine

The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐
tive terminal. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
creased idle speed.
If the vehicle being started has a diesel en‐
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being
started in the usual way.
219
If the first starting attempt is not success‐ Tow truck

ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing Do not lift the vehicle

Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
Note body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
Tow-starting and towing may result.◀
When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for
maneuvering the vehicle only.
an accident.◀ Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Switch off Intelligent Safety systems, refer to
page 104. Towing
Automatic transmission: transporting Follow the towing instructions
your vehicle Follow all towing instructions; otherwise,
vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀
Note
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
Therefore, contact a service center in the signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐
event of a breakdown. available.
Do not have the vehicle towed ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
Have your vehicle transported on a load‐ tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐ ▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
cur.◀ power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,
it will not be possible to control the vehicle
response.
220
Tow truck Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting

the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during
cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck that the tow rope is taut.
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
Do not lift the vehicle on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage Attaching the tow rope correctly
may result.◀ Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is
secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Towing other vehicles
General information Tow fitting

Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle re‐
sponse.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly

Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀ The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ front or rear of the BMW. It is in the onboard
pending on local regulations. vehicle tool kit located in a storage compart‐
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly ment on the right side in the cargo area. Open
identify the vehicle being towed by placing the cover.
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow. Tow fitting, information on use
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
Tow bar the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
The tow fittings used should be on the same ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
side on both vehicles. roads only.
221
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., 5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the warning system.
vehicle can occur.◀ 6. Have the vehicle checked.
Screw thread
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to

push it out.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 218. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐
gine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and

comply with local regulations.
2. Ignition, refer to page 63, on.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐
ately press on the clutch pedal again.
222
Care Mobility
Care
Vehicle equipment Intense soiling and road salt can damage
the vehicle.
equipment that is offered in the model series is Automatic car washes
ment is also described that is not available in a Hints
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
Car washes
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
Hints may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
Steam jets or high-pressure washers
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
When using steam jets or high-pressure
page 69, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away
vation.
and use a maximum temperature of
140 ℉/60 ℃. ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
be triggered by the interior motion sensor
If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a
of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐
tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐
refer to page 45.
sively high pressures or temperatures can
cause damage or preliminary damage that may Guide rails in car washes
then lead to long-term damage. Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
washer.◀ could be damaged.◀
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-

Before driving into a car wash
pressure washers
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
When using high-pressure washers, do not
car wash, take the following steps:
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g.,
Park Distance Control, for extended periods of Manual transmission:
time and only from a distance of at least 1. Drive into the car wash.
12 in/30 cm.◀
2. Shift to neutral.
▷ Regularly remove foreign items such as 3. Switch the engine off.
leaves in the area below the windshield
when the hood is raised.
Automatic transmission:
▷ Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly
in winter. 1. Drive into the car wash.
223
Mobility Care
2. Engage transmission position N. Completely remove all residues on the win‐

3. Switch the engine off. dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
In this way, the ignition remains switched
wiper blade wear.
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
Do not turn off the ignition in the car Vehicle care
wash
Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; Car care products
otherwise, the transmission position P is BMW recommends using cleaning and care
engaged and damages can result.◀ products from BMW, since these have been
tested and approved.
To start the engine:
Car care and cleaning products
Follow the instructions on the container.
When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
windows.
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
cles.
when in transmission position N. A signal is
sounded when an attempt is made to lock the Cleansers can contain substances that are
vehicle. dangerous and harmful to your health.◀
Transmission position Vehicle paint

Transmission position P is engaged automati‐ Regular care contributes to driving safety and
cally: value retention. Environmental influences in
▷ When the ignition is switched off. areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
Headlamps
influences.
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
Aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel,
caustic cleansers.
oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due immediately to prevent the finish from being
to insects, with shampoo and wash off with altered or discolored.
water.
▷ Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an Leather care
ice scraper. Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
After washing the vehicle
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action wear and premature degradation of the leather
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake surface.
discs can occur.
224
Care Mobility
To guard against discoloration, such as from ularly when they have been exposed to road
clothing, provide leather care roughly every salt.
two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ Rubber components
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially Aside from water, treat only with rubber
more visible. cleansers.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any
grease will gradually break down the protective silicon-containing car care products in order to
layer of the leather surface. avoid damage or reduced noise damping.
Suitable care products are available from the
service center. Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
Upholstery material care nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. soft cloth.
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use

Plastic components
a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita‐
ble interior cleaner. These include:
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using ▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ▷ Headliner.
material vigorously. ▷ Lamp lenses.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners ▷ Instrument cluster cover.
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or ▷ Matte black spray-coated components.
other articles of clothing can damage the seat ▷ Painted parts in the interior.
covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are
closed.◀ Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Lightly dampen the cloth with water.
Caring for special components Do not soak the headliner.
Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol
Light-alloy wheels or solvents
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ to surface damage.◀
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
Safety belts
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk. Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chrome surfaces Chemical cleaning
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply the webbing.◀
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
225
Mobility Care
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
belts clipped into their buckles. not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety can result.◀
belts until they are dry.
Long-term vehicle storage
Carpets and floor mats When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
No objects in the area around the pedals three months, special measures must be
taken. Additional information is available from
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
the service center.
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving and create the risk of an
accident.
Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, for example.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passen‐

ger compartment for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass
cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household
cleansers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the
unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
226
Care Mobility
227
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Reference Technical data
Technical data
Dimensions
BMW 3 Series Limousine
Width with mirrors inches/mm 79.9/2,031
Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.3/1,811
Height with roof antenna inches/mm 56.7/1,441
Height without roof antenna inches/mm 56.3/1,429
Length inches/mm 182.1/4,627
Wheel base inches/mm 110.6/2,810
Smallest turning circle diam. ft/m 37.1/11.3
Smallest turning circle diameter with xDrive ft/m 38.4/11.7
Weights
The values preceding the slash apply to vehi‐ lowing the slash apply to vehicles with auto‐
cles with manual transmission; the values fol‐ matic transmission.
320i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,300/4,340

kg 1,950/1,969
Load lbs/kg 900/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1,985/900
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,480/1,125
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 16.9/480
230
Technical data Reference
328i

kg 1,980/2,005
Load lbs/kg 900/408
335i

kg 2,059/2,071
Load lbs/kg 900/408
320i xDrive

kg 2,025/2,043
Load lbs/kg 900/408
231
Reference Technical data
328i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,585/2,080
Load lbs/kg 900/408
335i xDrive

kg 2,121/2,130
Load lbs/kg 900/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,280/1,034
328d
Load lbs/kg 900/408
328d xDrive
Load lbs/kg 900/408
232
Technical data Reference
328d xDrive
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank Gasoline: 15.8/60 Fuel quality, refer to

Diesel: 15/57 page 182
233
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A All around the steering AUTO program, automatic cli‐
wheel 14 mate control 147
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ All-season tires, refer to Win‐ AUTO program, climate con‐
tem 116 ter tires 196 trol 145
ACC, Active Cruise Control All-wheel-drive 117 AUTO program, intensity 147
with Stop & Go 121 Alternating-code hand-held Auto Start/Stop function 65
Acceleration Assistant, refer transmitter 152 Average fuel consumption 86
to Launch Control 74 Alternative oil types 202 Average speed 86
Activated-charcoal filter 149 Antifreeze, washer fluid 70 Axle loads, weights 230
Active Blind Spot Detec‐ Antilock Brake System,
tion 114 ABS 116 B
Active Cruise Control with Anti-slip control, refer to
Stop & Go, ACC 121 DSC 116 Backrest curvature, refer to
Adaptive brake lights, refer to Approved axle load 230 Lumbar support 51
Brake force display 115 Approved engine oils 202 Backrest, width 51
Adaptive Light Control 92 Arrival time 87 Band-aids, refer to First aid
Additives, oil 201 Ash tray 155 kit 218
Adjustments, seats/head re‐ Assistance, Roadside Assis‐ Bar for tow-starting/
straints 49 tance 218 towing 221
After washing vehicle 224 Assistance when driving Battery replacement, vehicle
Airbags 96 off 120 battery 215
Airbags, indicator/warning Assist system information, on Battery replacement, vehicle
light 97 Control Display 89 remote control 34
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ AUTO intensity 147 Battery, vehicle 214
culated-air mode 145, 148 Automatic car wash 223 Belts, safety belts 52
Air, dehumidifying, refer to Automatic climate con‐ Beverage holder, cu‐
Cooling function 145, 147 trol 144 pholder 161
Air distribution, Automatic climate control Blinds, sun protection 47
manual 145, 148 with enhanced features 146 BMW Advanced Diesel 183
Air flow, air conditioner 145 Automatic Cruise Control BMW Assist, see user's
Air flow, automatic climate with Stop & Go 121 manual for Navigation, En‐
control 148 Automatic Curb Monitor 57 tertainment and Communi‐
Air pressure, tires 187 Automatic deactivation, front cation
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ passenger airbags 98 BMW Homepage 6
tion 149 Automatic headlamp con‐ BMW Internet page 6
Alarm system 44 trol 92 BMW maintenance sys‐
Alarm, unintentional 45 Automatic locking 43 tem 204
All around the center con‐ Automatic recirculated-air Bonus range, ECO PRO 174
sole 16 control 148 Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
All around the headliner 17 Automatic transmission with pholder 161
Steptronic 71 Brake assistant 116
234
Everything from A to Z Reference
Brake discs, breaking in 166 Cargo straps, securing Closing/opening from in‐
Brake force display 115 cargo 170 side 40
Brake lamps, brake force dis‐ Car key, refer to Remote con‐ Closing/opening via door
play 115 trol 34 lock 39
Brake lights, adaptive 115 Carpet, care 226 Closing/opening with remote
Brake pads, breaking in 166 Car wash 223 control 38
Braking, hints 167 Catalytic converter, refer to Clothes hooks 161
Breakdown assis‐ Hot exhaust system 167 Coasting 176
tance 217, 218 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Coasting with engine decou‐
Breaking in 166 ice 204 pled, coasting 176
Brightness of Control Dis‐ CD/Multimedia, see user's Coasting with idling en‐
play 89 manual for Navigation, En‐ gine 176
Bulb replacement 206 tertainment and Communi‐ Cockpit 14
Bulb replacement, front 207 cation Cold starting, refer to Starting
Bulb replacement, halogen Center armrest 160 the engine 64
headlamps 207 Center console 16 Collision warning with braking
Bulb replacement, rear 212 Center-Lock, see button for function 108
Bulb replacement, xenon central locking 37 Collision warning with City
headlamps 210 Central locking system 37 Braking function 105
Bulbs and lamps 206 Central screen, refer to Con‐ Combination switch, refer to
Button, RES 124 trol Display 18 Turn signals 68
Button, Start/Stop 63 Changes, technical, refer to Combination switch, refer to
Bypassing, refer to Jump- Safety 7 Wiper system 68
starting 218 Changing parts 206 Comfort Access 41
Changing wheels 214 COMFORT program, Dy‐
C Changing wheels/tires 195 namic Driving Control 119
Check Control 78 Compartments in the
California Proposition 65 Checking the oil level elec‐ doors 160
Warning 7 tronically 200 Compass 153
Camera, care 226 Children, seating position 59 Computer 86
Camera, rearview cam‐ Children, transporting Condensation on win‐
era 133 safely 59 dows 148
Camera, Side View 136 Child restraint fixing sys‐ Condensation under the vehi‐
Camera, Top View 137 tem 59 cle 168
Can holder, refer to Cu‐ Child restraint fixing system Condition Based Service
pholder 161 LATCH 60 CBS 204
Car battery 214 Child restraint fixing systems, Configuring drive pro‐
Car care products 224 mounting 59 gram 119
Care, displays 226 Child safety locks 62 Confirmation signal 43
Care, vehicle 224 Child seat, mounting 59 ConnectedDrive, see user's
Cargo 169 Child seats 59 manual for Navigation, En‐
Cargo area, enlarging 157 Chrome parts, care 225 tertainment and Communi‐
Cargo area lid 40 Cigarette lighter 155 cation
Cargo area, storage compart‐ Cleaning, displays 226 ConnectedDrive Services
ments 162 Climate control 144, 146 Connecting electrical devi‐
Cargo, securing 170 Clock 81 ces 155
235
Control Display 18 Dimmable exterior mirrors 57 Dynamic Traction Control

Control Display, settings 88 Dimmable interior rearview DTC 117
Controller 18, 19 mirror 58
Control systems, driving sta‐ Direction indicator, refer to E
bility 116 Turn signals 68
Convenient opening 38 Display, electronic, instru‐ ECO PRO 173
Coolant 203 ment cluster 77 ECO PRO, bonus range 174
Coolant temperature 81 Display in windshield 89 ECO PRO display 173
Cooling function 145, 147 Display lighting, refer to In‐ ECO PRO driving mode 173
Cooling, maximum 147 strument lighting 94 ECO PRO driving style analy‐
Cooling system 203 Displays 75 sis 177
Corrosion on brake discs 168 Displays, cleaning 226 ECO PRO mode 173
Cruise control 128 Disposal, coolant 203 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐
Cruise control, active with Disposal, vehicle battery 215 struction 175
Stop & Go 121 Distance control, refer to EfficientDynamics 175
Cruising range 81 PDC 130 Electronic displays, instru‐
Cupholder 161 Distance to destination 87 ment cluster 77
Current fuel consumption 82 Divided screen view, split Electronic Stability Program
screen 24 ESP, refer to DSC 116
D Door lock, refer to Remote Emergency detection, remote
control 34 control 35
Damage, tires 195 Drive-off assistant 120 Emergency release, door
Damping control, dy‐ Drive-off assistant, refer to lock 40
namic 117 DSC 116 Emergency release, fuel filler
Data, technical 230 Driver assistance, see Intelli‐ flap 180
Date 81 gent Safety 104 Emergency Request 217
Daytime running lights 92 Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐ Emergency service, refer to
Defrosting, refer to defrosting gent Safety 104 Roadside Assistance 218
the windows 145 Driving Dynamics Con‐ Emergency start function, en‐
Defrosting, refer to Windows, trol 118 gine start 35
defrosting 148 Driving instructions, breaking Emergency unlocking, trunk
Defrosting the windows 145 in 166 lid 41
Dehumidifying, air 145, 147 Driving mode 118 Energy Control 82
Destination distance 87 Driving notes, general 166 Energy recovery 82
Diesel exhaust fluid, at low Driving stability control sys‐ Engine, automatic Start/Stop
temperatures 184 tems 116 function 65
Diesel exhaust fluid, having Driving style analysis 177 Engine, automatic switch-
refilled 184 Driving tips 166 off 65
Diesel exhaust fluid, on mini‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Engine compartment 198
mum 184 trol 116 Engine compartment, work‐
Diesel exhaust fluid, replen‐ DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ ing in 199
ishing yourself 184 trol 117 Engine coolant 203
Diesel particulate filter 167 Dynamic Damping Con‐ Engine idling when driving,
Digital clock 81 trol 117 coasting 176
Digital compass 153 Dynamic Stability Control Engine oil 200
Dimensions 230 DSC 116 Engine oil, adding 201
236
Engine oil additives 201 Fitting for towing, refer to G

Engine oil change 202 Tow fitting 221
Engine oil filler neck 201 Flat tire, changing Garage door opener, refer to
Engine oil temperature 80 wheels 214 Universal garage door
Engine oil types, alterna‐ Flat Tire Monitor FTM 102 opener 151
tive 202 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Gasoline 182
Engine oil types, ap‐ tor TPM 99 Gasoline quality 182
proved 202 Flat tire, warning Gear change, automatic
Engine start during malfunc‐ lamp 100, 103 transmission 72
tion 35 Flooding 167 Gear shift indicator 83
Engine start, jump-start‐ Floor carpet, care 226 General driving notes 166
ing 218 Floor mats, care 226 Glass sunroof, powered 47
Engine start, refer to Starting Fogged up windows 145 Glove compartment 159
the engine 64 Fold down the rear seat back‐ Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
Engine stop 65 rest, see Though-loading proved 230
Engine temperature 80 system 157
Entering a car wash 223 Fold-out position, windshield H
Equipment, interior 151 wipers 70
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ Foot brake 167 Handbrake, refer to parking
gram, refer to DSC 116 Front airbags 96 brake 67
Exchanging wheels/tires 195 Front fog lamps 94 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
Exhaust system 167 Front fog lamps, front, bulb nating code 152
Exterior mirror, automatic replacement 211 Hazard warning flashers 217
dimming feature 57 Front lamps 207 Head airbags 96
Exterior mirrors 56 Front passenger airbags, au‐ Headlamp control, auto‐
External start 218 tomatic deactivation 98 matic 92
External temperature dis‐ Front passenger airbags, indi‐ Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
play 81 cator lamp 98 ture 91
External temperature warn‐ FTM Flat Tire Monitor 102 Headlamp flasher 68
ing 81 Fuel 182 Headlamp glass 207
Eyes for securing cargo 170 Fuel cap 180 Headlamps 207
Fuel consumption, current 82 Headlamps, care 224
F Fuel consumption, refer to Headlamp washer system 68
Average fuel consump‐ Headliner 17
Failure message, refer to tion 86 Head restraints 49
Check Control 78 Fuel filler flap 180 Head restraints, front 53
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ Fuel gauge 80 Head restraints, rear 54
tional alarm 45 Fuel quality 182 Head-up Display 89
Fan, refer to Air Fuel recommendation 182 Head-up Display, care 226
flow 145, 148 Fuel, tank capacity 233 Heavy cargo, stowing 170
Fault displays, refer to Check Fuse 215 High-beam Assistant 93
Control 78 High beams 68
Filler neck for engine oil 201 High beams/low beams, refer
Fine wood, care 225 to High-beam Assistant 93
First aid kit 218 Hills 168
237
Hill start assistant, refer to Instrument cluster, electronic Lamp replacement, front 207
Drive-off assistant 120 displays 77 Lamp replacement, rear 212
Hints 6 Instrument lighting 94 Lamps 91
Holder for beverages 161 Integrated key 34 Lamps and bulbs 206
Homepage 6 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ Lane departure warning 112
Hood 199 quest 217 Lane margin, warning 112
Horn 14 Intelligent Safety 104 Language on Control Dis‐
Hotel function, trunk lid 41 Intensity, AUTO pro‐ play 88
Hot exhaust system 167 gram 147 Lashing eyes, securing
HUD Head-up Display 89 Interior equipment 151 cargo 170
Hydroplaning 167 Interior lamps 94 LATCH child restraint fixing
Interior lamps via remote con‐ system 60
I trol 38 Launch Control 74
Interior motion sensor 45 Leather, care 224
Ice warning, refer to External Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ LEDs, light-emitting di‐
temperature warning 81 matic dimming feature 58 odes 207
Icy roads, refer to External Interior rearview mirror, com‐ Letters and numbers, enter‐
temperature warning 81 pass 153 ing 25
Identification marks, tires 193 Interior rearview mirror, man‐ Light alloy wheels, care 225
Identification number, refer to ually dimmable 58 Light control 92
Important features in the en‐ Internet page 6 Light-emitting diodes,
gine compartment 198 Interval display, service re‐ LEDs 207
iDrive 18 quirements 82 Lighter 155
Ignition key, refer to Remote Lighting 91
control 34 J Lighting via remote con‐
Ignition off 63 trol 38
Ignition on 63 Jacking points for the vehicle Light switch 91
Indication of a flat jack 214 Load 170
tire 100, 103 Joystick, automatic transmis‐ Loading 169
Indicator and warning sion 72 Lock, door 39
lamps 78 Jump-starting 218 Locking/unlocking from in‐
Individual air distribu‐ side 40
tion 145, 148 K Locking/unlocking via door
Individual settings, refer to lock 39
Personal Profile 35 Key/remote control 34 Locking/unlocking with re‐
Inflation pressure, tires 187 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort mote control 38
Inflation pressure warning Access 41 Locking, automatic 43
FTM, tires 102 Key Memory, refer to Per‐ Locking, central 37
Info display, refer to Com‐ sonal Profile 35 Locking, settings 43
puter 86 Kickdown, automatic trans‐ Lock, power window 46
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ mission 72 Locks, doors, and win‐
tor TPM 100 Knee airbag 96 dows 62
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor Low beams 91
FTM 103 L Low beams, automatic, refer
Instrument cluster 75 to High-beam Assistant 93
Lamp replacement 206 Lower back support 51
238
Low-Sulfur Diesel 183 Medical kit 218 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
Luggage rack, refer to Roof- Memory, seat, mirror 55 agnosis 204
mounted luggage rack 171 Menu, EfficientDynamics 175 Obstacle marking, rearview
Lumbar support 51 Menu in instrument clus‐ camera 134
ter 85 Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐
M Menus, operating, iDrive 18 line quality 182
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ Odometer 81
Maintenance 204 ing concept 20 Office, see user's manual for
Maintenance require‐ Messages, refer to Check Navigation, Entertainment
ments 204 Control 78 and Communication
Maintenance, service require‐ Microfilter 146, 149 Oil 200
ments 82 Minimum tread, tires 195 Oil, adding 201
Maintenance system, Mirror 56 Oil additives 201
BMW 204 Mirror memory 55 Oil change 202
Malfunction displays, refer to Mobile communication devi‐ Oil change interval, service
Check Control 78 ces in the vehicle 167 requirements 82
Manual air distribu‐ Modifications, technical, refer Oil filler neck 201
tion 145, 148 to Safety 7 Oil types, alternative 202
Manual air flow 145, 148 Moisture in headlamp 207 Oil types, approved 202
Manual mode, transmis‐ Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ Old batteries, disposal 215
sion 73 play 18 Onboard monitor, refer to
Manual operation, door Mounting of child restraint fix‐ Control Display 18
lock 40 ing systems 59 Onboard vehicle tool kit 206
Manual operation, exterior Multifunction steering wheel, Opening and closing 34
mirrors 57 buttons 14 Opening and closing, from in‐
Manual operation, fuel filler side 40
flap 180 N Opening and closing via door
Manual operation, Park Dis‐ lock 39
tance Control PDC 131 Navigation, see user's manual Opening and closing, with re‐
Manual operation, rearview for Navigation, Entertain‐ mote control 38
camera 133 ment and Communication Opening the trunk lid with no-
Manual operation, Side Neck restraints, front, refer to touch activation 42
View 136 Head restraints 53 Operating concept, iDrive 18
Manual operation, Top Neck restraints, rear, refer to Optional equipment, standard
View 137 Head restraints 54 equipment 6
Manual transmission 71 Neutral cleaner, see wheel Outside air, refer to Auto‐
Marking on approved cleaner 225 matic recirculated-air con‐
tires 196 New wheels and tires 195 trol 148
Marking, run-flat tires 197 No Passing Information 83 Overheating of engine, refer
Master key, refer to Remote Nylon rope for tow-starting/ to Coolant temperature 81
control 34 towing 221
Maximum cooling 147 P
Maximum speed, display 83 O
Maximum speed, winter Paint, vehicle 224
tires 196 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 204 Parallel parking assistant 138
Measure, units of 89
239
Park Distance Control Radio-operated key, refer to RSC Run Flat System Com‐
PDC 130 Remote control 34 ponent, refer to Run-flat
Parked-car ventilation 149 Radio ready state 64 tires 197
Parked vehicle, condensa‐ Radio, see user's manual for Rubber components,
tion 168 Navigation, Entertainment care 225
Parking aid, refer to PDC 130 and Communication Run-flat tires 197
Parking assistant 138 Rain sensor 69
Parking brake 67 Rear lamps 212 S
Parking lamps 91 Rear socket 156
Particulate filter 167 Rearview camera 133 Safe braking 167
Passenger side mirror, tilting Rearview mirror 56 Safety 7
downward 57 Rear window de‐ Safety belt reminder for driv‐
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ froster 145, 148 er's seat and front passen‐
era 134 Recirculated-air filter 149 ger seat 53
PDC Park Distance Con‐ Recirculated-air Safety belts 52
trol 130 mode 145, 148 Safety belts, care 225
Pedestrian warning with city Recommended tire Safety switch, windows 46
braking function 110 brands 196 Safety systems, airbags 96
Personal Profile 35 Refueling 180 Saving fuel 172
Pinch protection system, Remaining range 81 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
glass sunroof 48 Remote control/key 34 play 18
Pinch protection system, win‐ Remote control, malfunc‐ Screwdriver 206
dows 46 tion 39 Screw thread for tow fit‐
Plastic, care 225 Remote control, univer‐ ting 222
Power failure 215 sal 151 Seat and mirror memory 55
Power sunroof, glass 47 Replacement fuse 215 Seat belts, refer to Safety
Power windows 45 Replacing parts 206 belts 52
Pressure, tire air pres‐ Replacing wheels/tires 195 Seat heating, front 52
sure 187 Reporting safety defects 9 Seat heating, rear 52
Pressure warning FTM, RES button 124 Seating position for chil‐
tires 102 Reserve warning, refer to dren 59
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ Range 81 Seats 49
file 35 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Selection list in instrument
Programmable memory but‐ TPM 100 cluster 85
tons, iDrive 24 Retaining straps, securing Selector lever, automatic
Protective function, glass cargo 170 transmission 72
sunroof 48 Retreaded tires 196 Sensors, care 226
Protective function, win‐ Roadside parking lamps 92 Service and warranty 8
dows 46 Roller sunblinds 47 Service requirements, Condi‐
Push-and-turn switch, refer to RON gasoline quality 182 tion Based Service
Controller 18, 19 Roof load capacity 230 CBS 204
Roof-mounted luggage Service requirements, dis‐
R rack 171 play 82
Rope for tow-starting/ Service, Roadside Assis‐
Radiator fluid 203 towing 221 tance 218
Services, ConnectedDrive
240
Settings, locking/unlock‐ Sport program, transmis‐ Technical changes, refer to

ing 43 sion 73 Safety 7
Settings on Control Dis‐ Sport steering, variable 118 Technical data 230
play 88 Stability control systems 116 Telephone, see user's manual
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ Start/stop, automatic func‐ for Navigation, Entertain‐
ror 55 tion 65 ment and Communication
Shifting, automatic transmis‐ Start/Stop button 63 Temperature, automatic cli‐
sion 71 Start function during malfunc‐ mate control 145, 147
Shifting, manual transmis‐ tion 35 Temperature display, external
sion 71 Starting the engine 64 temperature 81
Shift paddles on steering Status display, tires 99 Temperature, engine oil 80
wheel 73 Status information, iDrive 23 Tempomat, refer to Active
Side airbags 96 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Cruise Control 121
Side View 135 Steering wheel, adjusting 58 Terminal, starting aid 219
Signaling, horn 14 Steering wheel heating 58 Text message, supplemen‐
Signals when unlocking 43 Steptronic, automatic trans‐ tary 79
Sitting safely 49 mission 71 Theft alarm system, refer to
Size 230 Stopping the engine 65 Alarm system 44
Slide/tilt glass roof 47 Storage compartment in the Theft protection, refer to
Snow chains 197 rear 161 Central locking system 37
Socket 155 Storage compartments 159 Thigh support 51
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ Storage compartments, loca‐ Through-loading system 157
nostics 204 tions 159 Tilt alarm sensor 45
Soot particulate filter 167 Storage, tires 196 Time of arrival 87
SOS button 217 Storing the vehicle 226 Tire damage 195
Spare fuse 215 Summer tires, tread 194 Tire identification marks 193
Specified engine oil Supplementary text mes‐ Tire inflation pressure 187
types 202 sage 79 Tire inflation pressure moni‐
Speed, average 86 Surround View 132 tor, refer to FTM 102
Speed limit detection, on‐ Switch for Dynamic Driv‐ Tire Pressure Monitor
board computer 87 ing 118 TPM 99
Speed limiter, display 83 Switch-on times, parked-car Tires, changing 195
Speed Limit Information 83 ventilation 150 Tires, everything on wheels
Speed limit in the com‐ Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 and tires 187
puter 87 Symbols 6 Tires, run-flat tires 197
Split screen 24 Symbols in the status field 23 Tire tread 194
SPORT+ - program, Dynamic Tone, see user's manual for
Driving Control 118 T Navigation, Entertainment
Sport automatic transmis‐ and Communication
sion 73 Tachometer 80 Tools 206
Sport displays, torque dis‐ Tailgate 40 Top View 136
play, performance dis‐ Tailgate opening with no- Total vehicle weight 230
play 87 touch activation 42 Touchpad 21
SPORT program, Dynamic Tailgate via remote con‐ Tow fitting 221
Driving Control 118 trol 38 Towing 220
Tail lamps 212 Tow-starting 220
241
Tow truck 221 Updates made after the edito‐ Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ rial deadline 6 FTM 102
tor 99 Upholstery care 225 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
Traction control 117 USB interface 156 tor TPM 99
TRACTION program, Dy‐ Window defroster,
namic Driving Control 117 V rear 145, 148
Transmission, automatic 71 Windows, powered 45
Transmission, manual 71 Variable sport steering 118 Windshield washer fluid 70
Transporting children Vehicle battery 214 Windshield washer noz‐
safely 59 Vehicle battery, replac‐ zles 70
Tread, tires 194 ing 215 Windshield washer sys‐
Trip computer 87 Vehicle, breaking in 166 tem 68
Triple turn signal activa‐ Vehicle care 224 Windshield wiper 68
tion 68 Vehicle equipment 6 Windshield wipers, fold-out
Trip odometer 81 Vehicle identification number, position 70
Truck for tow-starting/ refer to Identification num‐ Winter diesel 183
towing 221 ber in the engine compart‐ Winter storage, care 226
Trunk lid 40 ment 198 Winter tires, suitable
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐ Vehicle jack 214 tires 196
ing 41 Vehicle paint 224 Winter tires, tread 194
Trunk lid, hotel function 41 Vehicle storage 226 Wiper blades, replacing 206
Trunk lid opening with no- Vehicle wash 223 Wiper fluid 70
touch activation 42 Ventilation 149 Wiper system 68
Trunk lid via remote con‐ Ventilation, refer to Parked- Wood, care 225
trol 38 car ventilation 149 Word match concept, naviga‐
Turning circle lines, rearview Voice activation system 26 tion 25
camera 134 Wrench 206
Turn signals, operation 68 W
Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐ X
placement 212 Warning indicators 78
Warning lamps 78 xDrive 117
U Warning messages, refer to Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐
Check Control 78 placement 210
Unintentional alarm 45 Warning triangle 218
Units of measure 89 Washer fluid 70
Universal remote control 151 Washer nozzles, wind‐
Unlock button, automatic shield 70
transmission 72 Washer system 68
Unlocking/locking from in‐ Washing, vehicle 223
side 40 Water on roads 167
Unlocking/locking via door Weights 230
lock 39 Welcome lamps 91
Unlocking/locking with re‐ Wheel cleaner 225
mote control 38 Wheels, changing 195
Unlocking, settings 43 Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 187
242
More about BMW
The Ultimate Driving

bmwusa.com Machine
01 40 2 926 810 ue
*BL292681000Y*

The BMW 3 Series Sedan.: Owner'S Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

The BMW 3 Series Sedan.: Owner'S Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Contents Owner's Manual for

A-Z The Ultimate Driving

THE BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13

ADDENDUM TO BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN

text beginning, “Have the work by your service center or a tire

Information about recommended 16. At page 204, under the heading:

thereof the following text should be

Use of recommended vehicle

The manufacturer of your vehicle

After a battery replacement, the

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13

Maintenance and repairs California Proposition 65 Warning

For Canadian customers

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 810 - X/13

All around the steering wheel

1 Roller sunblinds 47 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

3 Power windows 45 Intelligent Safety 104

Front fog lamps 94 Reduce distance 124

Parking lamps 91 Increase distance 124

Low beams 91 Cruise control rocker switch 129, 123

7 Steering column stalk, left

High beams, head‐ Thumbwheel for selection lists 85

Roadside parking lamps 92 Rain sensor 69

Computer 86 Clean the windshields and head‐

8 Steering wheel buttons, left 12 Start/stop the engine and switch

Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐

All around the center console

1 Headliner 17 9 Parking brake 67

5 Glove compartment 159 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

All around the headliner

1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lamps 94

2 Glass sunroof, powered 47 5 Interior lamps 94

3 Indicator lamp, front passenger

All standard, country-specific and optional Hints

Controls at a glance Switching on

Controller with navigation system

1. Turn. Press the but‐ Function

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

3. Move in four directions.

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

Buttons on controller Selecting menu items

Audio Open audio menu last lis‐

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Open previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

2. Press the controller.

Operating concept Menu items in the Owner's Manual

Changing between panels

View of an opened menu

Entering letters and numbers

▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters Changing settings

Move interactive map Slide in the corre‐

Enlarge/shrink interac‐ Drag inwards or

Display the menu or Tap once.